blob: 09c9611a5387a7cc2ac76bc6ac37e243dabd43d2 [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000014#include "llvm/ADT/APInt.h"
15#include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000016#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/Optional.h"
Chandler Carruth6bda14b2017-06-06 11:49:48 +000018#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000019#include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000020#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
21#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000022#include "llvm/ADT/SmallSet.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000023#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
24#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +000025#include "llvm/Analysis/AssumptionCache.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000026#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +000027#include "llvm/Analysis/EHPersonalities.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000028#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000029#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000030#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000031#include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000032#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruth6bda14b2017-06-06 11:49:48 +000033#include "llvm/IR/CallSite.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000034#include "llvm/IR/Constant.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000035#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000036#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
37#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
Andrea Di Biagiof20c57e2016-12-15 20:01:26 +000038#include "llvm/IR/DebugInfo.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000039#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000040#include "llvm/IR/GlobalValue.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000041#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
42#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000043#include "llvm/IR/InstrTypes.h"
44#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000045#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
46#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000047#include "llvm/IR/Intrinsics.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000048#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
49#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
50#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
51#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000052#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000053#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000054#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000055#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000056#include "llvm/IR/User.h"
57#include "llvm/IR/Value.h"
58#include "llvm/Support/Casting.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000059#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000060#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000061#include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h"
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +000062#include "llvm/Support/KnownBits.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000063#include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000064#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000065#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000066#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000067#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000068#include <algorithm>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000069#include <cassert>
70#include <climits>
71#include <cstddef>
72#include <cstdint>
73#include <iterator>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000074#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000075#include <set>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000076#include <utility>
77#include <vector>
78
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000079using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000080using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000081
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000082#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
83
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000084// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
85// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
86// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
87// minimum reasonable default.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000088static cl::opt<unsigned> PHINodeFoldingThreshold(
89 "phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
90 cl::desc(
91 "Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
92
93static cl::opt<bool> DupRet(
94 "simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
95 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000096
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000097static cl::opt<bool>
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000098 SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
99 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000100
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +0000101static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
102 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
103 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000104
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +0000105static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
106 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
107 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
108 "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
109 "predicated store"));
110
111static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
112 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
113 cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
114 "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
115
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000116static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
117 "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
118 cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
119 "executed"));
120
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000121static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
122 "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
123 cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
124 "speculatively executed instructions"));
125
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000126STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000127STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps,
128 "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
129STATISTIC(NumLookupTables,
130 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
131STATISTIC(
132 NumLookupTablesHoles,
133 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +0000134STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000135STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons,
136 "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000137STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000138
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000139namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000140
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000141// The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
142// case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
143// cases composing the case group.
144typedef SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000145 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000146// The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
147// and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
148// switch for that PHI.
149typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> SwitchCaseResultsTy;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000150
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000151/// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
152struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
153 ConstantInt *Value;
154 BasicBlock *Dest;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000155
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000156 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000157 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
158
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000159 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
160 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
161 return Value < RHS.Value;
162 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000163
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000164 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
165};
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000166
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000167class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000168 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000169 const DataLayout &DL;
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000170 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders;
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +0000171 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options;
172
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000173 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000174 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
175 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000176 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000177 BasicBlock *Pred,
178 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000179 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
180 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000181
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000182 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000183 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +0000184 bool SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
185 bool SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +0000186 bool SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000187 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000188 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000189 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000190 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
191 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000192
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000193public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000194 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
Joerg Sonnenbergerfa736742017-03-26 06:44:08 +0000195 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +0000196 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Opts)
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +0000197 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), LoopHeaders(LoopHeaders), Options(Opts) {}
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000198
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000199 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
200};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000201
202} // end anonymous namespace
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000203
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000204/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000205/// terminator instructions together.
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000206static bool
207SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2,
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +0000208 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> *FailBlocks = nullptr) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000209 if (SI1 == SI2)
210 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000211
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000212 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
213 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
214 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
215 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
216 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
James Molloy3c1137c2016-08-31 13:32:28 +0000217
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000218 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
219 bool Fail = false;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000220 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
221 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
222 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000223 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
224 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000225 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)) {
226 if (FailBlocks)
227 FailBlocks->insert(Succ);
228 Fail = true;
229 }
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000230 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000231
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000232 return !Fail;
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000233}
234
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000235/// Return true if it is safe and profitable to merge these two terminator
236/// instructions together, where SI1 is an unconditional branch. PhiNodes will
237/// store all PHI nodes in common successors.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000238static bool
239isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1, BranchInst *SI2,
240 Instruction *Cond,
241 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode *> &PhiNodes) {
242 if (SI1 == SI2)
243 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000244 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
245
246 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000247 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000248 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
249 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
250 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
251 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000252 if (!Ci2)
253 return false;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000254 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
255 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
256 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
257 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
258 return false;
259
260 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
261 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000262 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000263 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
264 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
265 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000266 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
267 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000268 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000269 return false;
270 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
271 }
272 return true;
273}
274
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000275/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
276/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
277/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
278/// of Succ.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000279static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
280 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000281 if (!isa<PHINode>(Succ->begin()))
282 return; // Quick exit if nothing to do
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000283
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000284 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000285 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin(); (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)); ++I)
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000286 PN->addIncoming(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000287}
288
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000289/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
290/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
291/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000292/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000293static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000294 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000295 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000296 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000297 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000298}
Sanjay Patelf9b77632015-09-15 15:24:42 +0000299
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000300/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
301/// return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000302/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
303/// which works well enough for us.
304///
305/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000306/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
307/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
308/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
309/// set and true is returned.
310///
311/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
312/// Select whose cost is 2.
313///
314/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
315/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
316/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000317static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000318 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000319 unsigned &CostRemaining,
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000320 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
321 unsigned Depth = 0) {
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000322 // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
323 // so limit the recursion depth.
324 // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
325 // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
326 if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
327 return false;
328
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000329 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000330 if (!I) {
331 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
332 // can be executed unconditionally.
333 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
334 if (C->canTrap())
335 return false;
336 return true;
337 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000338 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000339
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000340 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000341 // the bottom of this block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000342 if (PBB == BB)
343 return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000344
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000345 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
346 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000347 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
348 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000349 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000350 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000351
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000352 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
353 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000354 if (!AggressiveInsts)
355 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000356
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000357 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000358 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I))
359 return true;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000360
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000361 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
362 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
363 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000364 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000365 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000366
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000367 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000368
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000369 // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
370 // (as long as it is safe to do so).
371 // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
372 // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
373 // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
374 // enabled further IR optimizations.
375 if (Cost > CostRemaining &&
376 (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts->empty() || Depth > 0))
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000377 return false;
378
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000379 // Avoid unsigned wrap.
380 CostRemaining = (Cost > CostRemaining) ? 0 : CostRemaining - Cost;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000381
382 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
383 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000384 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000385 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI,
386 Depth + 1))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000387 return false;
388 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
389 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000390 return true;
391}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000392
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000393/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000394/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000395static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000396 // Normal constant int.
397 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000398 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000399 return CI;
400
401 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
402 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000403 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000404
405 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
406 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
407 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
408
409 // IntToPtr const int.
410 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
411 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
412 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
413 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
414 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
415 return CI;
416 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000417 return cast<ConstantInt>(
418 ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000419 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000420 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000421}
422
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000423namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000424
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000425/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
426/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
427/// structure.
428/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
429/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
430/// representing the different cases for the switch.
431/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
432/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
433/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
434/// fail.
435struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000436 const DataLayout &DL;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000437 Value *CompValue; /// Value found for the switch comparison
438 Value *Extra; /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
439 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals; /// Set of integers to match in switch
440 unsigned UsedICmps; /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000441
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000442 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000443 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL)
444 : DL(DL), CompValue(nullptr), Extra(nullptr), UsedICmps(0) {
445 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000446 }
447
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000448 /// Prevent copy
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000449 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000450 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000451 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000452
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000453private:
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000454 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
455 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
456 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000457 if (CompValue && CompValue != NewVal)
458 return false;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000459 CompValue = NewVal;
460 return (CompValue != nullptr);
461 }
462
463 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
464 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
465 /// match depending on isEQ).
466 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
467 /// against is placed in CompValue.
468 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
469 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000470 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000471 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
472 ICmpInst *ICI;
473 ConstantInt *C;
474 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000475 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000476 return false;
477 }
478
479 Value *RHSVal;
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000480 const APInt *RHSC;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000481
482 // Pattern match a special case
David Majnemerc761afd2016-01-27 02:43:28 +0000483 // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000484 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000485 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ : ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000486
487 // It's a little bit hard to see why the following transformations are
488 // correct. Here is a CVC3 program to verify them for 64-bit values:
489
490 /*
491 ONE : BITVECTOR(64) = BVZEROEXTEND(0bin1, 63);
492 x : BITVECTOR(64);
493 y : BITVECTOR(64);
494 z : BITVECTOR(64);
495 mask : BITVECTOR(64) = BVSHL(ONE, z);
496 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
497 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
498 );
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000499 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
500 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
501 );
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000502 */
503
504 // Please note that each pattern must be a dual implication (<--> or
505 // iff). One directional implication can create spurious matches. If the
506 // implication is only one-way, an unsatisfiable condition on the left
507 // side can imply a satisfiable condition on the right side. Dual
508 // implication ensures that satisfiable conditions are transformed to
509 // other satisfiable conditions and unsatisfiable conditions are
510 // transformed to other unsatisfiable conditions.
511
512 // Here is a concrete example of a unsatisfiable condition on the left
513 // implying a satisfiable condition on the right:
514 //
515 // mask = (1 << z)
516 // (x & ~mask) == y --> (x == y || x == (y | mask))
517 //
518 // Substituting y = 3, z = 0 yields:
519 // (x & -2) == 3 --> (x == 3 || x == 2)
520
521 // Pattern match a special case:
522 /*
523 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
524 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
525 );
526 */
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000527 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000528 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
529 APInt Mask = ~*RHSC;
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000530 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() & ~Mask) == C->getValue()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000531 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000532 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000533 return false;
534
535 Vals.push_back(C);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000536 Vals.push_back(
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000537 ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
538 C->getValue() | Mask));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000539 UsedICmps++;
540 return true;
541 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000542 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000543
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000544 // Pattern match a special case:
545 /*
546 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
547 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
548 );
549 */
550 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
551 m_Or(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
552 APInt Mask = *RHSC;
553 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() | Mask) == C->getValue()) {
554 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
555 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
556 return false;
557
558 Vals.push_back(C);
559 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
560 C->getValue() & ~Mask));
561 UsedICmps++;
562 return true;
563 }
564 }
565
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000566 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000567 if (!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000568 return false;
569
570 UsedICmps++;
571 Vals.push_back(C);
572 return ICI->getOperand(0);
573 }
574
575 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
Sanjoy Das7182d362015-03-18 00:41:24 +0000576 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
577 ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000578
579 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
580 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
581 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000582 if (match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
583 Span = Span.subtract(*RHSC);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000584 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
585 }
586
587 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
588 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
589 // x != 0 && x != 1.
590 if (!isEQ)
591 Span = Span.inverse();
592
593 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
Craig Topper7e3e7af2017-05-07 22:22:11 +0000594 if (Span.isSizeLargerThan(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000595 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000596 }
597
598 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000599 if (!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000600 return false;
601
602 // Add all values from the range to the set
603 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
604 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000605
606 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000607 return true;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000608 }
609
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000610 /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000611 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
612 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
613 /// vector.
614 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000615 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000616 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
617 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000618
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000619 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
620 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000621 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000622
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000623 // Initialize
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000624 Visited.insert(V);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000625 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000626
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000627 while (!DFT.empty()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000628 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000629
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000630 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
631 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
632 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000633 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(1)).second)
634 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
635 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(0)).second)
636 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000637 continue;
638 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000639
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000640 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000641 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000642 // Match succeed, continue the loop
643 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000644 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000645
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000646 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
647 // comparison against the same value as the others.
648 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
649 if (!Extra) {
650 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000651 continue;
652 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000653 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
654 CompValue = nullptr;
655 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000656 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000657 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000658};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000659
660} // end anonymous namespace
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000661
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000662static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000663 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000664 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
665 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
666 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
667 if (BI->isConditional())
668 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000669 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
670 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000671 }
672
673 TI->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000674 if (Cond)
675 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000676}
677
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000678/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000679/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000680Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000681 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000682 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
683 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
684 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000685 if (SI->getNumSuccessors() * std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()),
686 pred_end(SI->getParent())) <=
687 128)
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000688 CV = SI->getCondition();
689 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000690 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000691 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000692 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000693 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000694 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000695
696 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000697 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000698 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
699 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000700 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000701 CV = Ptr;
702 }
703 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000704 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000705}
706
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000707/// Given a value comparison instruction,
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000708/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000709BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
710 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000711 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000712 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000713 for (auto Case : SI->cases())
714 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(Case.getCaseValue(),
715 Case.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000716 return SI->getDefaultDest();
717 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000718
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000719 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000720 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000721 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000722 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(
723 GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL), Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000724 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000725}
726
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000727/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000728/// in the list that match the specified block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000729static void
730EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
731 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000732 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000733}
734
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000735/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000736static bool ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
737 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C2) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000738 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
739
740 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
741 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
742 std::swap(V1, V2);
743
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000744 if (V1->empty())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000745 return false;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000746 if (V1->size() == 1) {
747 // Just scan V2.
748 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
749 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
750 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
751 return true;
752 }
753
754 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
755 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
756 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
757 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
758 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
759 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
760 return true;
761 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
762 ++i1;
763 else
764 ++i2;
765 }
766 return false;
767}
768
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000769/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
770/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
771/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
772/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
773/// very limited form of jump threading.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000774bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(
775 TerminatorInst *TI, BasicBlock *Pred, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000776 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000777 if (!PredVal)
778 return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000779
780 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
781 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000782 if (ThisVal != PredVal)
783 return false; // Different predicates.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000784
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000785 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
786 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
787
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000788 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000789 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000790 BasicBlock *PredDef =
791 GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), PredCases);
792 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000793
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000794 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000795 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000796 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000797 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000798
799 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
800 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
801 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
802 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
803 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
804 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000805 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000806 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000807
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000808 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
809 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
810 // uncond br.
811 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
812 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000813 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000814 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000815
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000816 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000817 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000818
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000819 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000820 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
821 << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000822
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000823 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
824 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000825 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000826
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000827 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
828 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000829 SmallPtrSet<Constant *, 16> DeadCases;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000830 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
831 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000832
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000833 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000834 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000835
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000836 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
837 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000838 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000839 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
840 if (HasWeight)
841 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
842 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000843 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000844 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
845 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000846 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
847 --i;
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000848 if (DeadCases.count(i->getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000849 if (HasWeight) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000850 std::swap(Weights[i->getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000851 Weights.pop_back();
852 }
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000853 i->getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000854 SI->removeCase(i);
855 }
856 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000857 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000858 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000859 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
860 .createBranchWeights(Weights));
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000861
862 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000863 return true;
864 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000865
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000866 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
867 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000868 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000869 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000870 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
871 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000872 if (TIV)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000873 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000874 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
875 }
876 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000877
878 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
879 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000880 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000881 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
882 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
883 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
884 break;
885 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000886
887 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000888 if (!TheRealDest)
889 TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000890
891 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
892 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000893 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(TIBB))
894 if (Succ != CheckEdge)
895 Succ->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000896 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000897 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000898
899 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000900 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000901 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000902
903 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000904 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
905 << "\n");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000906
907 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
908 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000909}
910
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000911namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000912
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000913/// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
914/// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
915/// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
916struct ConstantIntOrdering {
917 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
918 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
919 }
920};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000921
922} // end anonymous namespace
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000923
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000924static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
925 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
926 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
927 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000928 if (LHS == RHS)
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000929 return 0;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000930 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()) ? 1 : -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000931}
932
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000933static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction *I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000934 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000935 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000936 if (MDString *MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000937 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
938
939 return false;
940}
941
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000942/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
943/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
944/// metadata.
945static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
946 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000947 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000948 assert(MD);
949 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000950 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000951 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000952 }
953
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000954 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
955 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
956 // default weight to be the first entry.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000957 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000958 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
959 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
960 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
961 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000962 }
963}
964
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +0000965/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000966static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000967 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
968 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
969 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
970 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
971 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000972 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000973}
974
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000975/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
976/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000977/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
978/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000979bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
980 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000981 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000982 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000983 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
984 bool Changed = false;
985
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000986 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000987 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +0000988 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000989
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000990 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
991 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000992 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000993
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000994 if (PCV == CV && TI != PTI) {
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +0000995 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock*, 4> FailBlocks;
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000996 if (!SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI, &FailBlocks)) {
997 for (auto *Succ : FailBlocks) {
Benjamin Kramer46f5e2c2017-03-24 14:15:35 +0000998 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(Succ, TI->getParent(), ".fold.split"))
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000999 return false;
1000 }
1001 }
1002
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001003 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001004 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001005 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
1006
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001007 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001008 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
1009
1010 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
1011 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
1012 // build.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001013 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001014
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001015 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
1016 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001017 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
1018 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
1019
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001020 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001021 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001022 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001023 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
1024 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1025 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001026 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
1027 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
1028 // successor's weights
1029 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001030
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001031 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001032 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001033 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001034 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001035 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
1036 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1037 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001038 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001039
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001040 if (PredDefault == BB) {
1041 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
1042 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001043 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001044 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1045 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
1046 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
1047 else {
1048 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
1049 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001050
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001051 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1052 // Increase weight for the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001053 Weights[0] += Weights[i + 1];
1054 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001055 Weights.pop_back();
1056 }
1057
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001058 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001059 --i;
1060 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001061 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001062
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001063 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001064 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
1065 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
1066 PredDefault = BBDefault;
1067 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
1068 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001069
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001070 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
1071 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001072 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1073 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
1074 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
1075 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1076 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001077 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1078 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
1079 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
1080 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001081 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i + 1]);
1082 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i + 1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001083 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001084 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001085
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001086 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1087 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
1088 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
1089 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
1090 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
1091 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
1092 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
1093 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001094 } else {
1095 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
1096 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
1097 // activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001098 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
1099 std::map<ConstantInt *, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001100 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1101 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
1102 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001103
1104 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001105 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i + 1];
1106 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001107 Weights.pop_back();
1108 }
1109
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001110 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
1111 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001112 --i;
1113 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001114 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001115
1116 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
1117 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001118 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1119 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
1120 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001121 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1122 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001123 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1124 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001125 PTIHandled.erase(
1126 BBCases[i].Value); // This constant is taken care of
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001127 }
1128
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001129 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
1130 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001131 for (ConstantInt *I : PTIHandled) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001132 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001133 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[I]);
1134 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001135 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001136 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001137 }
1138
1139 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
1140 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
1141 // successors.
Sanjay Patelf4b34b72015-09-10 16:25:38 +00001142 for (BasicBlock *NewSuccessor : NewSuccessors)
1143 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor, Pred, BB);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001144
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001145 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001146 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00001147 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001148 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001149 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001150 }
1151
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001152 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001153 SwitchInst *NewSI =
1154 Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00001155 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Sanjay Patel5e7bd912015-09-10 16:15:21 +00001156 for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1157 NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001158
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001159 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1160 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1161 FitWeights(Weights);
1162
1163 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1164
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001165 NewSI->setMetadata(
1166 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
1167 MDBuilder(BB->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001168 }
1169
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001170 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001171
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001172 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1173 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1174 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001175 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001176 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1177 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001178 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001179 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001180 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001181 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop",
1182 BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001183 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001184 }
1185 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1186 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001187
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001188 Changed = true;
1189 }
1190 }
1191 return Changed;
1192}
1193
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001194// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1195// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1196// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001197static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1198 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001199 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001200 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001201 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001202 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1203 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1204 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001205 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V == I1 || BB2V == I2)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001206 return false;
1207 }
1208 }
1209 }
1210 return true;
1211}
1212
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001213static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1214
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001215/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1216/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1217/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001218static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001219 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001220 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1221 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1222 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1223 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1224 // identical order.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001225 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1226 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001227
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001228 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1229 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1230
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001231 Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001232 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1233 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1234 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1235 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1236 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001237 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001238 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001239 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001240 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001241 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001242 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001243 return false;
1244
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001245 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001246
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001247 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001248 do {
1249 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1250 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1251 if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1))
1252 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001253
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001254 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1255 return Changed;
1256
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001257 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1258 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1259 // the now redundant second instruction.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001260 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), BB1->getInstList(), I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001261 if (!I2->use_empty())
1262 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
Peter Collingbourne8f1dd5c2016-09-07 23:39:04 +00001263 I1->andIRFlags(I2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001264 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1265 LLVMContext::MD_range,
1266 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
1267 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
1268 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull,
1269 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1270 LLVMContext::MD_align,
1271 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
1272 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null,
1273 LLVMContext::MD_mem_parallel_loop_access};
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001274 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs);
Dehao Chen87823f82016-09-08 21:53:33 +00001275
Robert Lougherb0124c12017-01-12 21:11:09 +00001276 // I1 and I2 are being combined into a single instruction. Its debug
1277 // location is the merged locations of the original instructions.
Dehao Chenf4646272017-10-02 18:13:14 +00001278 I1->applyMergedLocation(I1->getDebugLoc(), I2->getDebugLoc());
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001279
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001280 I2->eraseFromParent();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001281 Changed = true;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001282
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001283 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1284 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001285 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1286 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1287 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1288 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1289 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001290 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001291 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001292 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001293 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001294 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001295
1296 return true;
1297
1298HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001299 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1300 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001301 return Changed;
1302
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001303 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001304 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001305 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001306 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1307 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1308 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1309 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1310 continue;
1311
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001312 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1313 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
1314 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, PN) ||
1315 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, PN))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001316 return Changed;
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001317
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001318 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001319 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001320 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001321 return Changed;
1322 }
1323 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001324
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001325 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001326 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001327 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001328 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001329 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1330 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001331 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001332 }
1333
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001334 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001335 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1336 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1337 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1338 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001339 std::map<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, SelectInst *> InsertedSelects;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001340 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001341 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001342 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Chris Lattner01944572004-11-30 07:47:34 +00001343 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001344 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1345 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001346 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1347 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001348
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001349 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1350 // that determines the right value.
1351 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001352 if (!SI)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001353 SI = cast<SelectInst>(
1354 Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1355 BB1V->getName() + "." + BB2V->getName(), BI));
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001356
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001357 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
1358 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1359 if (PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1360 PN->setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001361 }
1362 }
1363
1364 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001365 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1))
1366 AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001367
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001368 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001369 return true;
1370}
1371
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001372// All instructions in Insts belong to different blocks that all unconditionally
1373// branch to a common successor. Analyze each instruction and return true if it
1374// would be possible to sink them into their successor, creating one common
1375// instruction instead. For every value that would be required to be provided by
1376// PHI node (because an operand varies in each input block), add to PHIOperands.
1377static bool canSinkInstructions(
1378 ArrayRef<Instruction *> Insts,
1379 DenseMap<Instruction *, SmallVector<Value *, 4>> &PHIOperands) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001380 // Prune out obviously bad instructions to move. Any non-store instruction
1381 // must have exactly one use, and we check later that use is by a single,
1382 // common PHI instruction in the successor.
1383 for (auto *I : Insts) {
1384 // These instructions may change or break semantics if moved.
1385 if (isa<PHINode>(I) || I->isEHPad() || isa<AllocaInst>(I) ||
1386 I->getType()->isTokenTy())
1387 return false;
Akira Hatanaka4ec7b202017-01-25 06:21:51 +00001388
1389 // Conservatively return false if I is an inline-asm instruction. Sinking
1390 // and merging inline-asm instructions can potentially create arguments
1391 // that cannot satisfy the inline-asm constraints.
1392 if (const auto *C = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I))
1393 if (C->isInlineAsm())
1394 return false;
1395
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001396 // Everything must have only one use too, apart from stores which
1397 // have no uses.
1398 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I) && !I->hasOneUse())
1399 return false;
1400 }
1401
1402 const Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
1403 for (auto *I : Insts)
1404 if (!I->isSameOperationAs(I0))
1405 return false;
1406
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001407 // All instructions in Insts are known to be the same opcode. If they aren't
1408 // stores, check the only user of each is a PHI or in the same block as the
1409 // instruction, because if a user is in the same block as an instruction
1410 // we're contemplating sinking, it must already be determined to be sinkable.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001411 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1412 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
James Molloy6c009c12016-09-07 09:01:22 +00001413 auto *Succ = I0->getParent()->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Eric Liu8c7d28b2017-03-15 15:29:42 +00001414 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse,&Succ](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001415 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
Eric Liu8c7d28b2017-03-15 15:29:42 +00001416 return (PNUse &&
1417 PNUse->getParent() == Succ &&
1418 PNUse->getIncomingValueForBlock(I->getParent()) == I) ||
1419 U->getParent() == I->getParent();
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001420 }))
1421 return false;
1422 }
1423
Aditya Kumar24f6ad512017-03-16 14:09:18 +00001424 // Because SROA can't handle speculating stores of selects, try not
1425 // to sink loads or stores of allocas when we'd have to create a PHI for
1426 // the address operand. Also, because it is likely that loads or stores
1427 // of allocas will disappear when Mem2Reg/SROA is run, don't sink them.
1428 // This can cause code churn which can have unintended consequences down
1429 // the line - see https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30244.
1430 // FIXME: This is a workaround for a deficiency in SROA - see
1431 // https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30188
1432 if (isa<StoreInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1433 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(1));
1434 }))
1435 return false;
1436 if (isa<LoadInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1437 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(0));
1438 }))
1439 return false;
1440
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001441 for (unsigned OI = 0, OE = I0->getNumOperands(); OI != OE; ++OI) {
1442 if (I0->getOperand(OI)->getType()->isTokenTy())
1443 // Don't touch any operand of token type.
1444 return false;
James Molloy104370a2016-09-11 09:00:03 +00001445
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001446 auto SameAsI0 = [&I0, OI](const Instruction *I) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001447 assert(I->getNumOperands() == I0->getNumOperands());
1448 return I->getOperand(OI) == I0->getOperand(OI);
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001449 };
1450 if (!all_of(Insts, SameAsI0)) {
1451 if (!canReplaceOperandWithVariable(I0, OI))
1452 // We can't create a PHI from this GEP.
1453 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001454 // Don't create indirect calls! The called value is the final operand.
1455 if ((isa<CallInst>(I0) || isa<InvokeInst>(I0)) && OI == OE - 1) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001456 // FIXME: if the call was *already* indirect, we should do this.
1457 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001458 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001459 for (auto *I : Insts)
1460 PHIOperands[I].push_back(I->getOperand(OI));
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001461 }
1462 }
1463 return true;
1464}
1465
1466// Assuming canSinkLastInstruction(Blocks) has returned true, sink the last
1467// instruction of every block in Blocks to their common successor, commoning
1468// into one instruction.
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001469static bool sinkLastInstruction(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001470 auto *BBEnd = Blocks[0]->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1471
1472 // canSinkLastInstruction returning true guarantees that every block has at
1473 // least one non-terminator instruction.
1474 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001475 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
1476 Instruction *I = BB->getTerminator();
1477 do {
1478 I = I->getPrevNode();
1479 } while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) && I != &BB->front());
1480 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1481 Insts.push_back(I);
1482 }
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001483
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001484 // The only checking we need to do now is that all users of all instructions
1485 // are the same PHI node. canSinkLastInstruction should have checked this but
1486 // it is slightly over-aggressive - it gets confused by commutative instructions
1487 // so double-check it here.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001488 Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001489 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1490 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1491 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
1492 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
1493 return U == PNUse;
1494 }))
1495 return false;
1496 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001497
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001498 // We don't need to do any more checking here; canSinkLastInstruction should
1499 // have done it all for us.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001500 SmallVector<Value*, 4> NewOperands;
1501 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O) {
1502 // This check is different to that in canSinkLastInstruction. There, we
1503 // cared about the global view once simplifycfg (and instcombine) have
1504 // completed - it takes into account PHIs that become trivially
1505 // simplifiable. However here we need a more local view; if an operand
1506 // differs we create a PHI and rely on instcombine to clean up the very
1507 // small mess we may make.
1508 bool NeedPHI = any_of(Insts, [&I0, O](const Instruction *I) {
1509 return I->getOperand(O) != I0->getOperand(O);
1510 });
1511 if (!NeedPHI) {
1512 NewOperands.push_back(I0->getOperand(O));
1513 continue;
1514 }
1515
1516 // Create a new PHI in the successor block and populate it.
1517 auto *Op = I0->getOperand(O);
1518 assert(!Op->getType()->isTokenTy() && "Can't PHI tokens!");
1519 auto *PN = PHINode::Create(Op->getType(), Insts.size(),
1520 Op->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
1521 for (auto *I : Insts)
1522 PN->addIncoming(I->getOperand(O), I->getParent());
1523 NewOperands.push_back(PN);
1524 }
1525
1526 // Arbitrarily use I0 as the new "common" instruction; remap its operands
1527 // and move it to the start of the successor block.
1528 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O)
1529 I0->getOperandUse(O).set(NewOperands[O]);
1530 I0->moveBefore(&*BBEnd->getFirstInsertionPt());
1531
Robert Lougher5bf04162017-01-04 17:40:32 +00001532 // Update metadata and IR flags, and merge debug locations.
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001533 for (auto *I : Insts)
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001534 if (I != I0) {
Dehao Chenf4646272017-10-02 18:13:14 +00001535 // The debug location for the "common" instruction is the merged locations
1536 // of all the commoned instructions. We start with the original location
1537 // of the "common" instruction and iteratively merge each location in the
1538 // loop below.
1539 // This is an N-way merge, which will be inefficient if I0 is a CallInst.
1540 // However, as N-way merge for CallInst is rare, so we use simplified API
1541 // instead of using complex API for N-way merge.
1542 I0->applyMergedLocation(I0->getDebugLoc(), I->getDebugLoc());
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001543 combineMetadataForCSE(I0, I);
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001544 I0->andIRFlags(I);
1545 }
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001546
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001547 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1548 // canSinkLastInstruction checked that all instructions were used by
1549 // one and only one PHI node. Find that now, RAUW it to our common
1550 // instruction and nuke it.
1551 assert(I0->hasOneUse());
1552 auto *PN = cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1553 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(I0);
1554 PN->eraseFromParent();
1555 }
1556
1557 // Finally nuke all instructions apart from the common instruction.
1558 for (auto *I : Insts)
1559 if (I != I0)
1560 I->eraseFromParent();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001561
1562 return true;
1563}
1564
1565namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001566
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001567 // LockstepReverseIterator - Iterates through instructions
1568 // in a set of blocks in reverse order from the first non-terminator.
1569 // For example (assume all blocks have size n):
1570 // LockstepReverseIterator I([B1, B2, B3]);
1571 // *I-- = [B1[n], B2[n], B3[n]];
1572 // *I-- = [B1[n-1], B2[n-1], B3[n-1]];
1573 // *I-- = [B1[n-2], B2[n-2], B3[n-2]];
1574 // ...
1575 class LockstepReverseIterator {
1576 ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks;
1577 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
1578 bool Fail;
1579 public:
1580 LockstepReverseIterator(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) :
1581 Blocks(Blocks) {
1582 reset();
1583 }
1584
1585 void reset() {
1586 Fail = false;
1587 Insts.clear();
1588 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001589 Instruction *Inst = BB->getTerminator();
1590 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1591 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
1592 if (!Inst) {
1593 // Block wasn't big enough.
1594 Fail = true;
1595 return;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001596 }
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001597 Insts.push_back(Inst);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001598 }
1599 }
1600
1601 bool isValid() const {
1602 return !Fail;
1603 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001604
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001605 void operator -- () {
1606 if (Fail)
1607 return;
1608 for (auto *&Inst : Insts) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001609 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1610 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
Benjamin Kramerd8b07972016-10-15 13:15:05 +00001611 // Already at beginning of block.
1612 if (!Inst) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001613 Fail = true;
1614 return;
1615 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001616 }
1617 }
1618
1619 ArrayRef<Instruction*> operator * () const {
1620 return Insts;
1621 }
1622 };
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001623
1624} // end anonymous namespace
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001625
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001626/// Given an unconditional branch that goes to BBEnd,
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001627/// check whether BBEnd has only two predecessors and the other predecessor
1628/// ends with an unconditional branch. If it is true, sink any common code
1629/// in the two predecessors to BBEnd.
1630static bool SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BranchInst *BI1) {
1631 assert(BI1->isUnconditional());
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001632 BasicBlock *BBEnd = BI1->getSuccessor(0);
1633
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001634 // We support two situations:
1635 // (1) all incoming arcs are unconditional
1636 // (2) one incoming arc is conditional
1637 //
1638 // (2) is very common in switch defaults and
1639 // else-if patterns;
1640 //
1641 // if (a) f(1);
1642 // else if (b) f(2);
1643 //
1644 // produces:
1645 //
1646 // [if]
1647 // / \
1648 // [f(1)] [if]
1649 // | | \
Amaury Sechet2fec7e42017-01-23 15:13:01 +00001650 // | | |
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001651 // | [f(2)]|
1652 // \ | /
1653 // [ end ]
1654 //
1655 // [end] has two unconditional predecessor arcs and one conditional. The
1656 // conditional refers to the implicit empty 'else' arc. This conditional
1657 // arc can also be caused by an empty default block in a switch.
1658 //
1659 // In this case, we attempt to sink code from all *unconditional* arcs.
1660 // If we can sink instructions from these arcs (determined during the scan
1661 // phase below) we insert a common successor for all unconditional arcs and
1662 // connect that to [end], to enable sinking:
1663 //
1664 // [if]
1665 // / \
1666 // [x(1)] [if]
1667 // | | \
1668 // | | \
1669 // | [x(2)] |
1670 // \ / |
1671 // [sink.split] |
1672 // \ /
1673 // [ end ]
1674 //
1675 SmallVector<BasicBlock*,4> UnconditionalPreds;
1676 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
1677 for (auto *B : predecessors(BBEnd)) {
1678 auto *T = B->getTerminator();
1679 if (isa<BranchInst>(T) && cast<BranchInst>(T)->isUnconditional())
1680 UnconditionalPreds.push_back(B);
1681 else if ((isa<BranchInst>(T) || isa<SwitchInst>(T)) && !Cond)
1682 Cond = T;
1683 else
1684 return false;
1685 }
1686 if (UnconditionalPreds.size() < 2)
James Molloy475f4a72016-08-22 18:13:12 +00001687 return false;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001688
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001689 bool Changed = false;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001690 // We take a two-step approach to tail sinking. First we scan from the end of
1691 // each block upwards in lockstep. If the n'th instruction from the end of each
1692 // block can be sunk, those instructions are added to ValuesToSink and we
1693 // carry on. If we can sink an instruction but need to PHI-merge some operands
1694 // (because they're not identical in each instruction) we add these to
1695 // PHIOperands.
1696 unsigned ScanIdx = 0;
1697 SmallPtrSet<Value*,4> InstructionsToSink;
1698 DenseMap<Instruction*, SmallVector<Value*,4>> PHIOperands;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001699 LockstepReverseIterator LRI(UnconditionalPreds);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001700 while (LRI.isValid() &&
1701 canSinkInstructions(*LRI, PHIOperands)) {
1702 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: instruction can be sunk: " << *(*LRI)[0] << "\n");
1703 InstructionsToSink.insert((*LRI).begin(), (*LRI).end());
1704 ++ScanIdx;
1705 --LRI;
1706 }
1707
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001708 auto ProfitableToSinkInstruction = [&](LockstepReverseIterator &LRI) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001709 unsigned NumPHIdValues = 0;
1710 for (auto *I : *LRI)
1711 for (auto *V : PHIOperands[I])
1712 if (InstructionsToSink.count(V) == 0)
1713 ++NumPHIdValues;
1714 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: #phid values: " << NumPHIdValues << "\n");
1715 unsigned NumPHIInsts = NumPHIdValues / UnconditionalPreds.size();
1716 if ((NumPHIdValues % UnconditionalPreds.size()) != 0)
1717 NumPHIInsts++;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001718
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001719 return NumPHIInsts <= 1;
1720 };
1721
1722 if (ScanIdx > 0 && Cond) {
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001723 // Check if we would actually sink anything first! This mutates the CFG and
1724 // adds an extra block. The goal in doing this is to allow instructions that
1725 // couldn't be sunk before to be sunk - obviously, speculatable instructions
1726 // (such as trunc, add) can be sunk and predicated already. So we check that
1727 // we're going to sink at least one non-speculatable instruction.
1728 LRI.reset();
1729 unsigned Idx = 0;
1730 bool Profitable = false;
1731 while (ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI) && Idx < ScanIdx) {
1732 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute((*LRI)[0])) {
1733 Profitable = true;
1734 break;
1735 }
1736 --LRI;
1737 ++Idx;
1738 }
1739 if (!Profitable)
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001740 return false;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001741
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001742 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Splitting edge\n");
1743 // We have a conditional edge and we're going to sink some instructions.
1744 // Insert a new block postdominating all blocks we're going to sink from.
1745 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(BI1->getSuccessor(0), UnconditionalPreds,
1746 ".sink.split"))
1747 // Edges couldn't be split.
1748 return false;
1749 Changed = true;
1750 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001751
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001752 // Now that we've analyzed all potential sinking candidates, perform the
1753 // actual sink. We iteratively sink the last non-terminator of the source
1754 // blocks into their common successor unless doing so would require too
1755 // many PHI instructions to be generated (currently only one PHI is allowed
1756 // per sunk instruction).
1757 //
1758 // We can use InstructionsToSink to discount values needing PHI-merging that will
1759 // actually be sunk in a later iteration. This allows us to be more
1760 // aggressive in what we sink. This does allow a false positive where we
1761 // sink presuming a later value will also be sunk, but stop half way through
1762 // and never actually sink it which means we produce more PHIs than intended.
1763 // This is unlikely in practice though.
1764 for (unsigned SinkIdx = 0; SinkIdx != ScanIdx; ++SinkIdx) {
1765 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Sink: "
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001766 << *UnconditionalPreds[0]->getTerminator()->getPrevNode()
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001767 << "\n");
1768
1769 // Because we've sunk every instruction in turn, the current instruction to
1770 // sink is always at index 0.
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001771 LRI.reset();
1772 if (!ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI)) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001773 // Too many PHIs would be created.
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001774 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: stopping here, too many PHIs would be created!\n");
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001775 break;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001776 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001777
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001778 if (!sinkLastInstruction(UnconditionalPreds))
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001779 return Changed;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001780 NumSinkCommons++;
1781 Changed = true;
1782 }
1783 return Changed;
1784}
1785
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001786/// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
1787/// conditional block.
1788///
1789/// We are looking for code like the following:
1790/// BrBB:
1791/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1792/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1793/// ... // function).
1794/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1795/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1796/// ThenBB:
1797/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1798/// br label EndBB
1799/// EndBB:
1800/// ...
1801/// We are going to transform this into:
1802/// BrBB:
1803/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1804/// ... //
1805/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1806/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1807/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1808/// ...
1809///
1810/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1811/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001812static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1813 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001814 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1815 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001816 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001817
1818 // Volatile or atomic.
1819 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001820 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001821
1822 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1823
1824 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001825 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 9;
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001826 for (Instruction &CurI : reverse(*BrBB)) {
1827 if (!MaxNumInstToLookAt)
1828 break;
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001829 // Skip debug info.
1830 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CurI))
1831 continue;
1832 --MaxNumInstToLookAt;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001833
David L Kreitzer96674172016-08-12 21:06:53 +00001834 // Could be calling an instruction that affects memory like free().
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001835 if (CurI.mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001836 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001837
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001838 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&CurI)) {
1839 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1840 if (SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1841 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1842 return SI->getValueOperand();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001843 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001844 }
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001845 }
1846
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001847 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001848}
1849
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001850/// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001851///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001852/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1853/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1854/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1855/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1856/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1857///
1858/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1859/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1860/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1861/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1862///
1863///
1864/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1865/// \code
1866/// BB:
1867/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1868/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1869/// ThenBB:
1870/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001871/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001872/// EndBB:
1873/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1874/// ...
1875/// \endcode
1876///
1877/// Into this IR:
1878/// \code
1879/// BB:
1880/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1881/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1882/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1883/// ...
1884/// \endcode
1885///
1886/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001887static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001888 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001889 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1890 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1891 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1892 return false;
1893
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001894 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1895 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1896
1897 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1898 // to swap the select operands later.
1899 bool Invert = false;
1900 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1901 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1902 Invert = true;
1903 }
1904 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1905
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001906 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1907 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1908 // - They are defined in BB, and
1909 // - They have no side effects, and
1910 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1911 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1912
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001913 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001914 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1915 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001916 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001917 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001918 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001919 Instruction *I = &*BBI;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001920 // Skip debug info.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001921 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1922 continue;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001923
Mark Lacey274f48b2015-04-12 18:18:51 +00001924 // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001925 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001926 ++SpeculationCost;
1927 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001928 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001929
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001930 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001931 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1932 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1933 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001934 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001935 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001936 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1937 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001938 return false;
1939
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001940 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1941 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1942 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1943
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001944 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001945 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001946 // being sunk into the use block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001947 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001948 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001949 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001950 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
1951
1952 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001953 }
1954 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001955
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001956 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
1957 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
1958 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001959 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator
1960 I = SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(),
1961 E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001962 I != E; ++I)
1963 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001964 ++SpeculationCost;
1965 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001966 return false;
1967 }
1968
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001969 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
1970 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001971 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001972 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001973 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
1974 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001975
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001976 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001977 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001978 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001979 continue;
1980
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001981 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
1982 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, PN) ||
1983 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, PN))
1984 return false;
1985
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001986 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001987 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
1988 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
1989 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001990 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
1991
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001992 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
1993 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001994 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001995 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
1996 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001997 unsigned MaxCost =
1998 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001999 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002000 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002001
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00002002 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
2003 // getting expanded into Instructions.
2004 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00002005 // constant expression.
2006 ++SpeculationCost;
2007 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002008 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002009 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002010
2011 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
2012 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002013 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002014 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002015
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002016 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002017 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002018
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002019 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
2020 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002021 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002022 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
2023 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
2024 if (Invert)
2025 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patel796db352016-03-26 23:30:50 +00002026 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(
2027 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002028 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
Dehao Chenf4646272017-10-02 18:13:14 +00002029 SpeculatedStore->applyMergedLocation(BI->getDebugLoc(),
2030 SpeculatedStore->getDebugLoc());
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002031 }
2032
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002033 // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
2034 // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002035 for (auto &I : *ThenBB)
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002036 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
2037
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00002038 // Hoist the instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002039 BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
2040 ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002041
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002042 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002043 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002044 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
2045 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
2046 unsigned OrigI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
2047 unsigned ThenI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
2048 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValue(OrigI);
2049 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValue(ThenI);
2050
2051 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
2052 if (OrigV == ThenV)
2053 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002054
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002055 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002056 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
2057 // destinations were inverted.
2058 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002059 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002060 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patelf11ab052016-04-15 15:32:12 +00002061 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(
2062 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002063 PN->setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
2064 PN->setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002065 }
2066
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002067 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002068 return true;
2069}
2070
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002071/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002072static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
2073 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002074 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002075
Devang Patel84fceff2009-03-10 18:00:05 +00002076 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002077 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
2078 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002079 if (Size > 10)
2080 return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002081 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002082
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002083 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002084 // live outside of the current basic block.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002085 for (User *U : BBI->users()) {
2086 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002087 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI))
2088 return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002089 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002090
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002091 // Looks ok, continue checking.
2092 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002093
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002094 return true;
2095}
2096
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002097/// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
2098/// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
2099/// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002100static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL,
2101 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002102 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
2103 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00002104 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
2105 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002106 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
2107 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002108
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002109 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
2110 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00002111 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002112 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002113 }
2114
2115 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002116 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB))
2117 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002118
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002119 // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
David Majnemer0a16c222016-08-11 21:15:00 +00002120 if (any_of(*BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002121 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I);
2122 return CI && (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent());
2123 }))
2124 return false;
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00002125
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002126 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
2127 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002128 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002129 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002130 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1))
2131 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002132
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002133 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
2134 // branch to RealDest.
2135 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
2136 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002137
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002138 if (RealDest == BB)
2139 continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002140 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002141 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator()))
2142 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002143
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002144 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
2145 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
2146 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
2147 // the edge we are about to create.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002148 BasicBlock *EdgeBB =
2149 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), RealDest->getName() + ".critedge",
2150 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002151 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002152
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002153 // Update PHI nodes.
2154 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002155
2156 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
2157 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
2158 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
2159 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002160 DenseMap<Value *, Value *> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002161 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
2162 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
2163 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
2164 continue;
2165 }
2166 // Clone the instruction.
2167 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002168 if (BBI->hasName())
2169 N->setName(BBI->getName() + ".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002170
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002171 // Update operands due to translation.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002172 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
2173 DenseMap<Value *, Value *>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002174 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
2175 *i = PI->second;
2176 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002177
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002178 // Check for trivial simplification.
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00002179 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, {DL, nullptr, nullptr, AC})) {
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002180 if (!BBI->use_empty())
2181 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
2182 if (!N->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Reid Kleckner96ab8722017-05-18 17:24:10 +00002183 N->deleteValue(); // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002184 N = nullptr;
2185 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002186 } else {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002187 if (!BBI->use_empty())
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002188 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002189 }
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002190 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
2191 if (N)
2192 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002193
2194 // Register the new instruction with the assumption cache if necessary.
2195 if (auto *II = dyn_cast_or_null<IntrinsicInst>(N))
2196 if (II->getIntrinsicID() == Intrinsic::assume)
2197 AC->registerAssumption(II);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002198 }
2199
2200 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
2201 // to EdgeBB instead.
2202 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
2203 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
2204 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
2205 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
2206 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
2207 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002208
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002209 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002210 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL, AC) | true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002211 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002212
2213 return false;
2214}
2215
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002216/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
2217/// see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002218static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
2219 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002220 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
2221 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
2222 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
2223 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
2224 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
2225 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002226 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
2227 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
2228 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002229 if (!IfCond ||
2230 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
2231 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
2232 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002233
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00002234 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
2235 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
2236 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
2237 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
2238 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
2239 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2240 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
2241 if (NumPhis > 2)
2242 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002243
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002244 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
2245 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
2246 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002247 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00002248 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
2249 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002250 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
2251 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002252
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002253 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
2254 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00002255 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, {DL, PN})) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002256 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002257 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002258 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002259 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002260
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002261 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002262 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002263 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002264 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002265 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002266 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002267
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00002268 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002269 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
2270 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002271 if (!PN)
2272 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002273
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002274 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
2275 // often be turned into switches and other things.
2276 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
2277 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
2278 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
2279 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
2280 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002281
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002282 // If all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all instructions
2283 // in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If not, we won't be able
2284 // to get rid of the control flow, so it's not worth promoting to select
2285 // instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002286 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002287 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
2288 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
2289 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002290 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002291 } else {
2292 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002293 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2294 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002295 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002296 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002297 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2298 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002299 return false;
2300 }
2301 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002302
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002303 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002304 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002305 } else {
2306 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002307 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2308 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002309 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002310 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002311 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2312 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002313 return false;
2314 }
2315 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002316
Chris Lattner9fd838d2010-12-14 07:23:10 +00002317 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: "
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002318 << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002319
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002320 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
2321 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002322 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002323 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002324
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002325 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
2326 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002327 if (IfBlock1) {
2328 for (auto &I : *IfBlock1)
2329 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002330 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002331 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002332 IfBlock1->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002333 }
2334 if (IfBlock2) {
2335 for (auto &I : *IfBlock2)
2336 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002337 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002338 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002339 IfBlock2->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002340 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002341
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002342 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
2343 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002344 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002345 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002346
Sanjay Patel9e23fed2016-03-17 15:30:52 +00002347 Value *Sel = Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "", InsertPt);
2348 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(Sel);
2349 Sel->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002350 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002351 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002352
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002353 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
2354 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
2355 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
2356 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00002357 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2358 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002359 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002360 return true;
2361}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002362
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002363/// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
2364/// try to merge them together into one return,
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002365/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002366static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002367 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002368 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
2369 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2370 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2371 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
2372 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002373
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002374 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
2375 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
2376 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002377 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002378 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002379 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002380 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002381
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002382 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002383 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
2384 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
2385 // branch into a return.
2386 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
2387 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2388 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002389 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002390 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002391 return true;
2392 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002393
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002394 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
2395 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
2396 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
2397 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002398
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002399 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
2400 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
2401 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
2402 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
2403 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
2404 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
2405 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002406
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002407 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
2408 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
2409 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
2410 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
2411 // safe.
2412 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
2413 if (TCV->canTrap())
2414 return false;
2415 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
2416 if (FCV->canTrap())
2417 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002418
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002419 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
2420 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
2421 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2422 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002423
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002424 // Insert select instructions where needed.
2425 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002426 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002427 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002428 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
2429 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
2430 TrueValue = FalseValue;
2431 } else {
Sanjay Patelfacf45a2016-04-27 23:14:12 +00002432 TrueValue =
2433 Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue, FalseValue, "retval", BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002434 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002435 }
2436
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002437 Value *RI =
2438 !TrueValue ? Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002439
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002440 (void)RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002441
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002442 DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002443 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002444 << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: " << *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002445
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002446 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
2447
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002448 return true;
2449}
2450
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002451/// Return true if the given instruction is available
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002452/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
Benjamin Kramerabbfe692012-07-13 13:25:15 +00002453static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002454 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2455 return false;
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002456 for (Instruction &I : *PB) {
2457 Instruction *PBI = &I;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002458 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2459 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2460 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2461 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2462 return true;
2463 }
2464 }
2465 return false;
2466}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002467
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002468/// Return true if either PBI or BI has branch weight available, and store
2469/// the weights in {Pred|Succ}{True|False}Weight. If one of PBI and BI does
2470/// not have branch weight, use 1:1 as its weight.
2471static bool extractPredSuccWeights(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2472 uint64_t &PredTrueWeight,
2473 uint64_t &PredFalseWeight,
2474 uint64_t &SuccTrueWeight,
2475 uint64_t &SuccFalseWeight) {
2476 bool PredHasWeights =
2477 PBI->extractProfMetadata(PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
2478 bool SuccHasWeights =
2479 BI->extractProfMetadata(SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
2480 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
2481 if (!PredHasWeights)
2482 PredTrueWeight = PredFalseWeight = 1;
2483 if (!SuccHasWeights)
2484 SuccTrueWeight = SuccFalseWeight = 1;
2485 return true;
2486 } else {
2487 return false;
2488 }
2489}
2490
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002491/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
2492/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
2493/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002494bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002495 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002496
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002497 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002498 if (BI->isConditional())
2499 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2500 else {
2501 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2502 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
Craig Topper36af40c2017-08-02 02:34:16 +00002503 // successor. If such pattern exists, check for CSE between BB and its
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002504 // predecessor.
2505 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2506 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2507 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2508 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2509 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002510 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002511 Instruction *Curr = &*I++;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002512 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2513 Cond = Curr;
2514 break;
2515 }
2516 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
2517 if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB))
2518 return false;
2519 }
2520 }
2521
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002522 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002523 return false;
2524 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002525
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002526 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2527 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002528 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002529
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002530 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002531 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = ++Cond->getIterator();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002532
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002533 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002534 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt))
2535 ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002536
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002537 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002538 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002539
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002540 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2541 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2542 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2543 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
2544 // number of the bonus instructions does not exceed a certain threshold.
2545 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002546 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != &*I; ++I) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002547 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2548 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2549 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002550 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&*I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002551 return false;
2552 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2553 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2554 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2555 return false;
2556 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2557 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2558 // and Cond.
2559 ++NumBonusInsts;
2560 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2561 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2562 return false;
2563 }
2564
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002565 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2566 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2567 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2568 if (CE->canTrap())
2569 return false;
2570 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2571 if (CE->canTrap())
2572 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002573
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002574 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002575 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002576 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002577 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2578 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002579
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002580 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2581 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002582 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002583
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002584 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2585 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2586 // blocks.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002587 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002588 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002589 (BI->isConditional() && !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002590 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2591 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002592 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002593
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002594 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002595 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002596 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002597
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002598 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002599 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002600 Opc = Instruction::Or;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002601 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002602 Opc = Instruction::And;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002603 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest) {
2604 Opc = Instruction::And;
2605 InvertPredCond = true;
2606 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest) {
2607 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2608 InvertPredCond = true;
2609 } else {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002610 continue;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002611 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002612 } else {
2613 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2614 continue;
2615 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002616
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002617 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002618 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002619
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002620 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2621 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002622 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002623
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002624 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2625 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2626 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2627 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002628 NewCond =
2629 Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, PBI->getCondition()->getName() + ".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002630 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002631
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002632 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002633 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002634 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002635
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002636 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002637 // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002638 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2639 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2640 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002641 // all instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002642 // instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002643 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != &*BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002644 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2645 continue;
2646 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2647 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002648 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002649 VMap[&*BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002650
2651 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2652 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2653 // only given the branch precondition.
2654 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2655 // semantics we don't understand.
Adrian Prantlcbdfdb72015-08-20 22:00:30 +00002656 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002657
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002658 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
2659 NewBonusInst->takeName(&*BonusInst);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002660 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002661 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002662
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002663 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2664 // two conditions together.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00002665 Instruction *New = Cond->clone();
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002666 RemapInstruction(New, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002667 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002668 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), New);
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002669 New->takeName(Cond);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002670 Cond->setName(New->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002671
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002672 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002673 Instruction *NewCond = cast<Instruction>(
2674 Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(), New, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002675 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2676
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002677 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002678 bool HasWeights =
2679 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
2680 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002681 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2682
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002683 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002684 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002685 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2686 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002687 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002688 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002689 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002690 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2691 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2692 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002693 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight *
2694 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2695 PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002696 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002697 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2698 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2699 }
2700 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002701 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002702 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2703 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002704 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002705 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002706 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight *
2707 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2708 PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2709 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002710 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2711 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002712 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2713 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2714 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002715 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2716 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2717 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2718
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002719 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),
2720 NewWeights.end());
2721 PBI->setMetadata(
2722 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2723 MDBuilder(BI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002724 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002725 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002726 } else {
2727 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2728 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002729 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002730 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002731 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002732 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002733 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2734 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2735 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2736 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002737 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2738 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2739 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(
2740 Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And, NotCond, New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002741 if (PBI_C->isOne())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002742 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2743 Instruction::Or, PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002744 } else {
2745 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2746 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2747 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002748 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2749 Instruction::And, PBI->getCondition(), New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002750 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002751 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2752 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2753 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2754 Instruction::Or, NotCond, MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002755 }
2756 }
2757 // Update PHI Node.
2758 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2759 MergedCond);
2760 }
2761 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2762 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2763 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2764 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002765 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002766
Michael Kuperstein3ca147e2016-12-16 21:23:59 +00002767 // If BI was a loop latch, it may have had associated loop metadata.
2768 // We need to copy it to the new latch, that is, PBI.
2769 if (MDNode *LoopMD = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop))
2770 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop, LoopMD);
2771
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002772 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2773 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
2774
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002775 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002776 for (Instruction &I : *BB)
2777 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2778 I.clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002779
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002780 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002781 }
2782 return false;
2783}
2784
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002785// If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
2786// nullptr.
2787static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
2788 StoreInst *S = nullptr;
2789 for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
2790 if (!BB)
2791 continue;
2792 for (auto &I : *BB)
2793 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
2794 if (S)
2795 // Multiple stores seen.
2796 return nullptr;
2797 else
2798 S = SI;
2799 }
2800 }
2801 return S;
2802}
2803
2804static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
2805 Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
2806 // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
2807 // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
2808 //
2809 // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
2810 // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
2811 // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
2812 // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
2813 // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
2814 // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
2815 // one.
2816 //
2817 // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
2818 // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
2819 // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
2820 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
2821 BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002822
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002823 for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
2824 if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
2825 PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
2826 if (!AlternativeV)
2827 break;
2828
2829 assert(std::distance(pred_begin(Succ), pred_end(Succ)) == 2);
2830 auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
2831 BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
2832 if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
2833 break;
2834 PHI = nullptr;
2835 }
2836 if (PHI)
2837 return PHI;
2838
James Molloy3d21dcf2015-12-16 14:12:44 +00002839 // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
2840 if (!AlternativeV &&
2841 (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
2842 return V;
2843
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002844 PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002845 PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
2846 for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
2847 if (PredBB != BB)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002848 PHI->addIncoming(
2849 AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()), PredBB);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002850 return PHI;
2851}
2852
2853static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB,
2854 BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
2855 BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address,
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00002856 bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond,
2857 const DataLayout &DL) {
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002858 auto IsaBitcastOfPointerType = [](const Instruction &I) {
2859 return Operator::getOpcode(&I) == Instruction::BitCast &&
2860 I.getType()->isPointerTy();
2861 };
2862
2863 // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
2864 // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
2865 auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB) {
2866 if (!BB)
2867 return true;
2868 // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
2869 // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
2870 // thread this store.
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002871 unsigned N = 0;
2872 for (auto &I : *BB) {
2873 // Cheap instructions viable for folding.
2874 if (isa<BinaryOperator>(I) || isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I) ||
2875 isa<StoreInst>(I))
2876 ++N;
2877 // Free instructions.
2878 else if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) ||
2879 IsaBitcastOfPointerType(I))
2880 continue;
2881 else
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002882 return false;
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002883 }
2884 return N <= PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002885 };
2886
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002887 if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively &&
2888 (!IsWorthwhile(PTB) || !IsWorthwhile(PFB) || !IsWorthwhile(QTB) ||
2889 !IsWorthwhile(QFB)))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002890 return false;
2891
2892 // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
2893 // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
2894 // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
2895 // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
2896 // testing.
2897 StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
2898 StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
2899 if (!PStore || !QStore)
2900 return false;
2901
2902 // Now check the stores are compatible.
2903 if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
2904 return false;
2905
2906 // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
2907 // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
2908 // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
2909 // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
2910 // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
2911 // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
2912 // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
2913 //
2914 // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
2915 // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
2916 // check there are no other memory operations at all.
2917 for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
2918 if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2919 return false;
2920 for (auto &I : *QFB)
2921 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2922 return false;
2923 if (QTB)
2924 for (auto &I : *QTB)
2925 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2926 return false;
2927 for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
2928 I != E; ++I)
2929 if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2930 return false;
2931
2932 // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
2933 // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
2934 Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2935 ->getCondition();
2936 Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2937 ->getCondition();
2938
2939 Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
2940 PStore->getParent());
2941 Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
2942 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
2943
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002944 IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
2945
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002946 Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
2947 Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
2948
2949 if (InvertPCond)
2950 PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
2951 if (InvertQCond)
2952 QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
2953 Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
2954
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002955 auto *T =
2956 SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(), false);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002957 QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
2958 StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
2959 AAMDNodes AAMD;
2960 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
2961 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
2962 SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00002963 unsigned PAlignment = PStore->getAlignment();
2964 unsigned QAlignment = QStore->getAlignment();
2965 unsigned TypeAlignment =
2966 DL.getABITypeAlignment(SI->getValueOperand()->getType());
2967 unsigned MinAlignment;
2968 unsigned MaxAlignment;
2969 std::tie(MinAlignment, MaxAlignment) = std::minmax(PAlignment, QAlignment);
2970 // Choose the minimum alignment. If we could prove both stores execute, we
2971 // could use biggest one. In this case, though, we only know that one of the
2972 // stores executes. And we don't know it's safe to take the alignment from a
2973 // store that doesn't execute.
2974 if (MinAlignment != 0) {
2975 // Choose the minimum of all non-zero alignments.
2976 SI->setAlignment(MinAlignment);
2977 } else if (MaxAlignment != 0) {
2978 // Choose the minimal alignment between the non-zero alignment and the ABI
2979 // default alignment for the type of the stored value.
2980 SI->setAlignment(std::min(MaxAlignment, TypeAlignment));
2981 } else {
2982 // If both alignments are zero, use ABI default alignment for the type of
2983 // the stored value.
2984 SI->setAlignment(TypeAlignment);
2985 }
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002986
2987 QStore->eraseFromParent();
2988 PStore->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002989
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002990 return true;
2991}
2992
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00002993static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI,
2994 const DataLayout &DL) {
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002995 // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
2996 // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
2997 // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
2998 // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
2999 // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
3000 // PBI and QBI.
3001 //
3002 // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
3003 // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
3004 // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
3005 // sequences can be if-converted away.
3006 //
3007 // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
3008 //
3009 // PBI or PBI or a combination of the two
3010 // / \ | \
3011 // PTB PFB | PFB
3012 // \ / | /
3013 // QBI QBI
3014 // / \ | \
3015 // QTB QFB | QFB
3016 // \ / | /
3017 // PostBB PostBB
3018 //
3019 // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
3020 // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
3021 // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003022 //
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003023 BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
3024 BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
3025 BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
3026 BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
3027 BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
3028
Craig Topper7af07882017-04-21 15:53:42 +00003029 // Make sure we have a good guess for PostBB. If QTB's only successor is
3030 // QFB, then QFB is a better PostBB.
3031 if (QTB->getSingleSuccessor() == QFB)
3032 PostBB = QFB;
3033
3034 // If we couldn't find a good PostBB, stop.
3035 if (!PostBB)
3036 return false;
3037
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003038 bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
3039 // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
3040 if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
3041 std::swap(PFB, PTB);
3042 InvertPCond = true;
3043 }
3044 if (QFB == PostBB) {
3045 std::swap(QFB, QTB);
3046 InvertQCond = true;
3047 }
3048
3049 // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
3050 // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
3051 if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
3052 PTB = nullptr;
3053 if (QTB == PostBB)
3054 QTB = nullptr;
3055
3056 // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
3057 // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
3058 // predecessor.
3059 auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003060 return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P && BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003061 };
Craig Topper7af07882017-04-21 15:53:42 +00003062 if (!HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003063 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
3064 return false;
3065 if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
3066 (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
3067 return false;
Craig Topperc2280682017-04-17 22:13:00 +00003068 if (!PostBB->hasNUses(2) || !QBI->getParent()->hasNUses(2))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003069 return false;
3070
3071 // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
3072 // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003073 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003074 for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
3075 if (!BB)
3076 continue;
3077 for (auto &I : *BB)
3078 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3079 PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3080 }
3081 for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
3082 if (!BB)
3083 continue;
3084 for (auto &I : *BB)
3085 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3086 QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3087 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003088
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003089 set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
3090 // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
3091 // clear what it contains.
3092 auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
3093
3094 bool Changed = false;
3095 for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
3096 Changed |= mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003097 PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address, InvertPCond, InvertQCond, DL);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003098 return Changed;
3099}
3100
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003101/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
3102/// this function tries to simplify it. We know
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003103/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
3104/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003105static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
3106 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003107 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
3108 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00003109
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003110 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003111 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003112 // this conditional branch redundant.
3113 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
3114 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3115 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
3116 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
3117 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
3118 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
3119 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003120 BI->setCondition(
3121 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue));
3122 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003123 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003124
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003125 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
3126 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
3127 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
3128 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003129 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003130 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
3131 Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
3132 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00003133 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
3134 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
3135 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003136 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003137 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003138 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) && PBI != BI &&
3139 PBI->isConditional() && PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003140 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3141 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003142 NewPN->addIncoming(
3143 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue),
3144 P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003145 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003146 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003147 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003148 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003149
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003150 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003151 return true;
3152 }
3153 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003154
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003155 if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
3156 if (CE->canTrap())
3157 return false;
3158
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003159 // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
3160 // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
3161 // merged store at the end.
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003162 if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI, DL))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003163 return true;
3164
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003165 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00003166 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003167 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00003168 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
3169 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
3170 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
3171 ++BBI;
3172 if (&*BBI != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003173 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00003174
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003175 int PBIOp, BIOp;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003176 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3177 PBIOp = 0;
3178 BIOp = 0;
3179 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3180 PBIOp = 0;
3181 BIOp = 1;
3182 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3183 PBIOp = 1;
3184 BIOp = 0;
3185 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3186 PBIOp = 1;
3187 BIOp = 1;
3188 } else {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003189 return false;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003190 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003191
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003192 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
3193 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
3194 // keep getting unwound.
3195 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
3196 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003197
3198 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003199 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
3200 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003201
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003202 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
3203 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
3204 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
3205
3206 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003207 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003208 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);
3209 ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003210 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
3211 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003212
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003213 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
3214 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3215 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
3216 if (CE->canTrap())
3217 return false;
3218
3219 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3220 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3221 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
3222 if (CE->canTrap())
3223 return false;
3224 }
3225
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003226 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003227 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003228
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003229 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00003230 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003231
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003232 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
3233 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
3234 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
3235 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
3236 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
3237 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
3238 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
3239 if (OtherDest == BB) {
3240 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
3241 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003242 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock =
3243 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003244 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
3245 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003246 }
3247
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003248 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003249
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003250 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
3251 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003252
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003253 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
3254 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00003255 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003256 if (PBIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003257 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003258
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003259 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
3260 if (BIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003261 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003262
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003263 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003264 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003265
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003266 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
3267 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
3268 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
3269 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003270
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003271 // Update branch weight for PBI.
3272 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003273 uint64_t PredCommon, PredOther, SuccCommon, SuccOther;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003274 bool HasWeights =
3275 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
3276 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003277 if (HasWeights) {
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003278 PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3279 PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3280 SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3281 SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003282 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
3283 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
3284 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00003285 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
3286 PredOther * SuccCommon,
3287 PredOther * SuccOther};
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003288 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003289 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3290
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003291 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003292 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
3293 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003294 }
3295
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003296 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
3297 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003298 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003299
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003300 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
3301 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
3302 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
3303 // them agree.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003304 PHINode *PN;
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003305 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
3306 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(II)); ++II) {
3307 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3308 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3309 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3310 if (BIV != PBIV) {
3311 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003312 SelectInst *NV = cast<SelectInst>(
3313 Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName() + ".mux"));
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003314 PN->setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003315 // Although the select has the same condition as PBI, the original branch
3316 // weights for PBI do not apply to the new select because the select's
3317 // 'logical' edges are incoming edges of the phi that is eliminated, not
3318 // the outgoing edges of PBI.
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003319 if (HasWeights) {
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003320 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3321 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3322 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3323 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
3324 // The weight to PredCommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal.
3325 // The weight to PredOtherDest should be PredOther * SuccCommon.
3326 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther),
3327 PredOther * SuccCommon};
3328
3329 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3330
3331 NV->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3332 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
3333 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
3334 }
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003335 }
3336 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003337
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003338 DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
3339 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003340
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003341 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
3342 // one fewer predecessor.
3343 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003344}
3345
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003346// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
3347// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003348// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
3349// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
3350// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
3351static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003352 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
3353 uint32_t TrueWeight,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003354 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003355 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
3356 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
3357 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
3358 // successor.
3359 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003360 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003361
3362 // Then remove the rest.
Pete Cooperebcd7482015-08-06 20:22:46 +00003363 for (BasicBlock *Succ : OldTerm->successors()) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003364 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
3365 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003366 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003367 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003368 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003369 else
David Majnemerdc3b67b2015-10-21 18:22:24 +00003370 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent(),
3371 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003372 }
3373
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003374 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
3375 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
3376
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003377 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003378 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003379 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
3380 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
3381 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003382 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003383 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003384 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
3385 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003386 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
3387 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
3388 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003389 MDBuilder(OldTerm->getContext())
3390 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003391 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003392 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
3393 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
3394 // terminator must be unreachable.
3395 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
3396 } else {
3397 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
3398 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
3399 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003400 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003401 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003402 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003403 else
3404 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003405 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003406 }
3407
3408 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
3409 return true;
3410}
3411
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003412// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003413// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
3414// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
3415// unconditional otherwise.
3416static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
3417 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
3418 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
3419 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
3420 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
3421 return false;
3422
3423 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
3424 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003425 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
3426 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003427
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003428 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
3429 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
3430 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3431 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3432 if (HasWeights) {
3433 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3434 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003435 TrueWeight =
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003436 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003437 FalseWeight =
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003438 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003439 }
3440 }
3441
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003442 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003443 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, TrueWeight,
3444 FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003445}
3446
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003447// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003448// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
3449// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
3450// with
3451// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
3452static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
3453 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
3454 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
3455 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
3456 if (!TBA || !FBA)
3457 return false;
3458
3459 // Extract the actual blocks.
3460 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
3461 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
3462
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003463 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003464 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, 0,
3465 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003466}
3467
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003468/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
3469/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003470/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
3471/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
3472/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
3473/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
3474/// like:
3475///
3476/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
3477/// DEFAULT:
3478/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
3479/// br label %end
3480/// end:
3481/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003482///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003483/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
3484/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00003485static bool tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003486 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const DataLayout &DL,
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00003487 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003488 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003489
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003490 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
3491 // complex.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003492 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse())
3493 return false;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003494
3495 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
3496 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003497
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003498 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
3499 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
3500 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
3501 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003502 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
3503 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003504
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003505 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
3506 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
3507 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003508
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003509 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
3510 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
3511 // away.
3512 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
3513 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
3514 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
3515 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003516
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00003517 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, {DL, ICI})) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003518 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003519 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3520 }
3521 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00003522 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003523 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003524
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003525 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
3526 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
3527 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003528 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003529 Value *V;
3530 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3531 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3532 else
3533 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003534
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003535 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
3536 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3537 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00003538 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003539 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003540
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003541 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
3542 // the block.
3543 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003544 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003545 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003546 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
3547 return false;
3548
3549 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
3550 // true in the PHI.
3551 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003552 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003553
3554 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3555 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
3556
3557 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
3558 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
3559 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
3560 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3561
3562 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
3563 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003564 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3565 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003566 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3567 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3568 if (HasWeights) {
3569 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3570 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3571 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003572 Weights[0] = (Weights[0] + 1) >> 1;
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003573 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
3574
3575 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003576 SI->setMetadata(
3577 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3578 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003579 }
3580 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003581 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003582
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003583 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003584 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
3585 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
3586 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003587 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
3588 return true;
3589}
3590
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003591/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003592/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
3593/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003594static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
3595 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003596 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003597 if (!Cond)
3598 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003599
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003600 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
3601 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
3602 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003603
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00003604 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003605 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
3606 // Unpack the result
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003607 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003608 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
3609 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
3610 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003611
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003612 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003613 if (!CompVal)
3614 return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003615
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003616 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
3617 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
3618 return false;
3619
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003620 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
3621
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003622 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
3623 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
3624 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3625 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003626
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003627 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
Sanjay Patel59661452015-09-10 15:14:34 +00003628 // transformation. A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003629 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2)
3630 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003631
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00003632 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
3633 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
3634
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003635 // Figure out which block is which destination.
3636 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003637 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
3638 if (!TrueWhenEqual)
3639 std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003640
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003641 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003642
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003643 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003644 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n"
3645 << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003646
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003647 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
3648 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
3649 // right before the condbr to handle it.
3650 if (ExtraCase) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003651 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3652 BB->splitBasicBlock(BI->getIterator(), "switch.early.test");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003653 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
3654 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003655 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
3656
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003657 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003658 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003659 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003660 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003661
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003662 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003663
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00003664 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
3665 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003666 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003667
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003668 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003669 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003670 BB = NewBB;
3671 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003672
3673 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003674 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
3675 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003676 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
3677 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003678 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003679
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003680 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003681 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00003682
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003683 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
3684 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
3685 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003686
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003687 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
3688 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
3689 // the number of edges added.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003690 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003691 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
3692 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003693 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size() - 1; i != e; ++i)
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003694 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
3695 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003696
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003697 // Erase the old branch instruction.
3698 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003699
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003700 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003701 return true;
3702}
3703
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003704bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003705 if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
3706 return SimplifyCommonResume(RI);
3707 else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
3708 RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
3709 // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
3710 return SimplifySingleResume(RI);
Chen Li509ff212016-01-11 19:20:53 +00003711
3712 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003713}
3714
3715// Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
3716bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
3717 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3718
3719 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics
3720 // between the phi of landing pads (RI->getValue()) and resume instruction.
3721 BasicBlock::iterator I = cast<Instruction>(RI->getValue())->getIterator(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003722 E = RI->getIterator();
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003723 while (++I != E)
3724 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3725 return false;
3726
Mandeep Singh Grang799a2ed2017-04-24 19:20:45 +00003727 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003728 auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
3729
3730 // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003731 for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues(); Idx != End;
3732 Idx++) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003733 auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
3734 auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3735
3736 // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
3737 // it has other dependents.
3738 if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
3739 continue;
3740
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003741 auto *LandingPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003742 // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
3743 if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
3744 continue;
3745
3746 bool isTrivial = true;
3747
3748 I = IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
3749 E = IncomingBB->getTerminator()->getIterator();
3750 while (++I != E)
3751 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3752 isTrivial = false;
3753 break;
3754 }
3755
3756 if (isTrivial)
3757 TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
3758 }
3759
3760 // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003761 if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty())
3762 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003763
3764 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
3765 for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
3766 // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
3767 // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
3768 // to remove them all.
3769 while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
3770 BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
3771
3772 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(TrivialBB), PE = pred_end(TrivialBB);
3773 PI != PE;) {
3774 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3775 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
3776 }
3777
3778 // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
3779 // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
3780 // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
3781 // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
3782 // predecessors.
3783 TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
3784 new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
3785 }
3786
3787 // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
3788 if (pred_empty(BB))
3789 BB->eraseFromParent();
3790
3791 return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
3792}
3793
3794// Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
3795bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003796 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3797 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003798 assert(RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
3799 "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003800
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003801 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
3802 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003803 while (++I != E)
3804 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3805 return false;
3806
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003807 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003808 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3809 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3810 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003811 }
3812
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003813 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3814 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003815 if (LoopHeaders)
3816 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003817 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003818}
3819
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003820static bool removeEmptyCleanup(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003821 // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
3822 // eliminated. If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
3823 // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
3824 // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
3825 // instruction converted to a call instruction. If the cleanup pad being
3826 // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
3827 // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
3828 // simplified.
3829 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003830 CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
3831 if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003832 // This isn't an empty cleanup.
3833 return false;
3834
David Majnemer2482e1c2016-06-04 23:50:03 +00003835 // We cannot kill the pad if it has multiple uses. This typically arises
3836 // from unreachable basic blocks.
3837 if (!CPInst->hasOneUse())
3838 return false;
3839
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003840 // Check that there are no other instructions except for benign intrinsics.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003841 BasicBlock::iterator I = CPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003842 while (++I != E) {
3843 auto *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(I);
3844 if (!II)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003845 return false;
3846
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003847 Intrinsic::ID IntrinsicID = II->getIntrinsicID();
3848 switch (IntrinsicID) {
3849 case Intrinsic::dbg_declare:
3850 case Intrinsic::dbg_value:
3851 case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
3852 break;
3853 default:
3854 return false;
3855 }
3856 }
3857
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003858 // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
3859 // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003860 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003861 Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003862
3863 // We're about to remove BB from the control flow. Before we do, sink any
3864 // PHINodes into the unwind destination. Doing this before changing the
3865 // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
3866 // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
3867 // are both EH pads).
3868 if (UnwindDest) {
3869 // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
3870 // reference the block we are removing
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003871 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = UnwindDest->begin(),
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003872 IE = DestEHPad->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003873 I != IE; ++I) {
3874 PHINode *DestPN = cast<PHINode>(I);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003875
Andrew Kaylor2a9a6d82015-09-05 01:00:51 +00003876 int Idx = DestPN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003877 // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
Craig Topper02a55d72015-09-05 04:49:44 +00003878 assert(Idx != -1);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003879 // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
3880 // path through the cleanup pad we are removing. If the incoming
3881 // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
3882 // verified above that the block is otherwise empty). Otherwise, the
3883 // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
3884 // pad being removed.
3885 //
3886 // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
3887 // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
3888 // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
3889 // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
3890 Value *SrcVal = DestPN->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3891 PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
3892
3893 // Remove the entry for the block we are deleting.
3894 DestPN->removeIncomingValue(Idx, false);
3895
3896 if (SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB) {
3897 // If the incoming value was a PHI node in the cleanup pad we are
3898 // removing, we need to merge that PHI node's incoming values into
3899 // DestPN.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003900 for (unsigned SrcIdx = 0, SrcE = SrcPN->getNumIncomingValues();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003901 SrcIdx != SrcE; ++SrcIdx) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003902 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcPN->getIncomingValue(SrcIdx),
3903 SrcPN->getIncomingBlock(SrcIdx));
3904 }
3905 } else {
3906 // Otherwise, the incoming value came from above BB and
3907 // so we can just reuse it. We must associate all of BB's
3908 // predecessors with this value.
3909 for (auto *pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3910 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcVal, pred);
3911 }
3912 }
3913 }
3914
3915 // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003916 Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003917 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(),
3918 IE = BB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003919 I != IE;) {
3920 // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
3921 // being moved to another block.
3922 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(I++);
3923 if (PN->use_empty())
3924 // If the PHI node has no uses, just leave it. It will be erased
3925 // when we erase BB below.
3926 continue;
3927
3928 // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
3929 // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
3930 // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
3931 // BB. In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
3932 for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
3933 if (pred != BB)
3934 PN->addIncoming(PN, pred);
3935 PN->moveBefore(InsertPt);
3936 }
3937 }
3938
3939 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3940 // The iterator must be updated here because we are removing this pred.
3941 BasicBlock *PredBB = *PI++;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003942 if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003943 removeUnwindEdge(PredBB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003944 } else {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003945 TerminatorInst *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003946 TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003947 }
3948 }
3949
3950 // The cleanup pad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3951 BB->eraseFromParent();
3952 return true;
3953}
3954
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003955// Try to merge two cleanuppads together.
3956static bool mergeCleanupPad(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
3957 // Skip any cleanuprets which unwind to caller, there is nothing to merge
3958 // with.
3959 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
3960 if (!UnwindDest)
3961 return false;
3962
3963 // This cleanupret isn't the only predecessor of this cleanuppad, it wouldn't
3964 // be safe to merge without code duplication.
3965 if (UnwindDest->getSinglePredecessor() != RI->getParent())
3966 return false;
3967
3968 // Verify that our cleanuppad's unwind destination is another cleanuppad.
3969 auto *SuccessorCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(&UnwindDest->front());
3970 if (!SuccessorCleanupPad)
3971 return false;
3972
3973 CleanupPadInst *PredecessorCleanupPad = RI->getCleanupPad();
3974 // Replace any uses of the successor cleanupad with the predecessor pad
3975 // The only cleanuppad uses should be this cleanupret, it's cleanupret and
3976 // funclet bundle operands.
3977 SuccessorCleanupPad->replaceAllUsesWith(PredecessorCleanupPad);
3978 // Remove the old cleanuppad.
3979 SuccessorCleanupPad->eraseFromParent();
3980 // Now, we simply replace the cleanupret with a branch to the unwind
3981 // destination.
3982 BranchInst::Create(UnwindDest, RI->getParent());
3983 RI->eraseFromParent();
3984
3985 return true;
3986}
3987
3988bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00003989 // It is possible to transiantly have an undef cleanuppad operand because we
3990 // have deleted some, but not all, dead blocks.
3991 // Eventually, this block will be deleted.
3992 if (isa<UndefValue>(RI->getOperand(0)))
3993 return false;
3994
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003995 if (mergeCleanupPad(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003996 return true;
3997
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003998 if (removeEmptyCleanup(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003999 return true;
4000
4001 return false;
4002}
4003
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004004bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004005 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004006 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
4007 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004008
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004009 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004010 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
4011 SmallVector<BranchInst *, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00004012 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
4013 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004014 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
4015 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
4016 if (BI->isUnconditional())
4017 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
4018 else
4019 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
4020 }
4021 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004022
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004023 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004024 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004025 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4026 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
4027 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004028 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004029 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004030 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004031
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004032 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004033 if (pred_empty(BB)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004034 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
4035 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004036 if (LoopHeaders)
4037 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004038 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004039
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004040 return true;
4041 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004042
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004043 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
4044 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
4045 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
4046 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4047 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004048
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004049 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
4050 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
4051 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004052 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004053 return true;
4054 }
4055 return false;
4056}
4057
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004058bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
4059 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004060
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004061 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004062
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004063 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
4064 // be removed, do so.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004065 while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
4066 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004067 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004068 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
4069 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
4070 // operations may have this effect.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004071 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
4072 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004073
4074 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004075 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004076 if (SI->isVolatile())
4077 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004078 } else if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004079 if (LI->isVolatile())
4080 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004081 } else if (auto *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004082 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
4083 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004084 } else if (auto *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004085 if (CXI->isVolatile())
4086 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004087 } else if (isa<CatchPadInst>(BBI)) {
4088 // A catchpad may invoke exception object constructors and such, which
4089 // in some languages can be arbitrary code, so be conservative by
4090 // default.
4091 // For CoreCLR, it just involves a type test, so can be removed.
4092 if (classifyEHPersonality(BB->getParent()->getPersonalityFn()) !=
4093 EHPersonality::CoreCLR)
4094 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004095 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
4096 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004097 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004098 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00004099 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
4100 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
4101 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
4102 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004103 }
4104
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00004105 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
4106 if (!BBI->use_empty())
4107 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00004108 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004109 Changed = true;
4110 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004111
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004112 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
4113 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004114 if (&BB->front() != UI)
4115 return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004116
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004117 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004118 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
4119 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004120 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004121 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004122 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
4123 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
4124 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4125 TI->eraseFromParent();
4126 Changed = true;
4127 }
4128 } else {
4129 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004130 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004131 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
4132 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004133 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004134 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
4135 Changed = true;
4136 }
4137 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004138 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004139 for (auto i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004140 if (i->getCaseSuccessor() != BB) {
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004141 ++i;
4142 continue;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004143 }
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004144 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4145 i = SI->removeCase(i);
4146 e = SI->case_end();
4147 Changed = true;
4148 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004149 } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
4150 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4151 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4152 Changed = true;
4153 }
4154 } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
4155 if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4156 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4157 Changed = true;
4158 continue;
4159 }
4160
4161 for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
4162 E = CSI->handler_end();
4163 I != E; ++I) {
4164 if (*I == BB) {
4165 CSI->removeHandler(I);
4166 --I;
4167 --E;
4168 Changed = true;
4169 }
4170 }
4171 if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
4172 BasicBlock *CatchSwitchBB = CSI->getParent();
4173 if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
4174 // Redirect preds to the unwind dest
4175 CatchSwitchBB->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
4176 } else {
4177 // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
4178 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(CatchSwitchBB));
4179 for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
4180 removeUnwindEdge(EHPred);
4181 }
4182 // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
4183 new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
4184 CSI->eraseFromParent();
4185 Changed = true;
4186 }
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00004187 } else if (isa<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00004188 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4189 TI->eraseFromParent();
4190 Changed = true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004191 }
4192 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004193
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004194 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004195 if (pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004196 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
4197 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004198 if (LoopHeaders)
4199 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004200 return true;
4201 }
4202
4203 return Changed;
4204}
4205
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004206static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
4207 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
4208
4209 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
4210 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4211 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
4212 return false;
4213 }
4214 return true;
4215}
4216
4217/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
4218/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004219static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004220 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004221
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004222 bool HasDefault =
4223 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004224
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004225 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
4226 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
4227 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004228 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
4229 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004230
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004231 for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
4232 BasicBlock *Dest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004233 if (!DestA)
4234 DestA = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004235 if (Dest == DestA) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004236 CasesA.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004237 continue;
4238 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004239 if (!DestB)
4240 DestB = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004241 if (Dest == DestB) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004242 CasesB.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004243 continue;
4244 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004245 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004246 }
4247
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004248 assert(DestA && DestB &&
4249 "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004250 assert(DestA != DestB);
4251 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
4252 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
4253 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
4254
4255 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
4256 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
4257 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
4258 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
4259 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
4260 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
4261 ContiguousDest = DestA;
4262 OtherDest = DestB;
4263 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
4264 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
4265 ContiguousDest = DestB;
4266 OtherDest = DestA;
4267 } else
4268 return false;
4269
4270 // Start building the compare and branch.
4271
4272 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004273 Constant *NumCases =
4274 ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004275
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00004276 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
4277 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004278 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
4279
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004280 Value *Cmp;
4281 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004282 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004283 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
4284 else
4285 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004286 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004287
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004288 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004289 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
4290 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004291 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4292 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004293 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
4294 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
4295 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4296 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
4297 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
4298 else
4299 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
4300 }
4301 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
4302 TrueWeight /= 2;
4303 FalseWeight /= 2;
4304 }
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004305 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004306 MDBuilder(SI->getContext())
4307 .createBranchWeights((uint32_t)TrueWeight,
4308 (uint32_t)FalseWeight));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004309 }
4310 }
4311
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004312 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
4313 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4314 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004315 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4316 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004317 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004318 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4319 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004320 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4321 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004322 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4323 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004324 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
4325 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4326 }
4327
4328 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004329 SI->eraseFromParent();
4330
4331 return true;
4332}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004333
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004334/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004335/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00004336static bool eliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, AssumptionCache *AC,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004337 const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004338 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00004339 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Craig Topper8205a1a2017-05-24 16:53:07 +00004340 KnownBits Known = computeKnownBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004341
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004342 // We can also eliminate cases by determining that their values are outside of
4343 // the limited range of the condition based on how many significant (non-sign)
4344 // bits are in the condition value.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004345 unsigned ExtraSignBits = ComputeNumSignBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI) - 1;
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004346 unsigned MaxSignificantBitsInCond = Bits - ExtraSignBits;
4347
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004348 // Gather dead cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004349 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> DeadCases;
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004350 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Craig Toppere777fed2017-05-22 00:49:35 +00004351 const APInt &CaseVal = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +00004352 if (Known.Zero.intersects(CaseVal) || !Known.One.isSubsetOf(CaseVal) ||
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004353 (CaseVal.getMinSignedBits() > MaxSignificantBitsInCond)) {
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004354 DeadCases.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004355 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case " << CaseVal << " is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004356 }
4357 }
4358
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004359 // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
4360 // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it. If we know some
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004361 // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
4362 // number of possible unique case values.
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004363 bool HasDefault =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004364 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4365 const unsigned NumUnknownBits =
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +00004366 Bits - (Known.Zero | Known.One).countPopulation();
Filipe Cabecinhas48b090a2015-09-10 22:34:39 +00004367 assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004368 if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004369 NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004370 SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004371 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004372 BasicBlock *NewDefault =
4373 SplitBlockPredecessors(SI->getDefaultDest(), SI->getParent(), "");
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004374 SI->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefault);
4375 SplitBlock(&*NewDefault, &NewDefault->front());
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004376 auto *OldTI = NewDefault->getTerminator();
4377 new UnreachableInst(SI->getContext(), OldTI);
4378 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTI);
4379 return true;
4380 }
4381
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004382 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
4383 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
4384 if (HasWeight) {
4385 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4386 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
4387 }
4388
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004389 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004390 for (ConstantInt *DeadCase : DeadCases) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004391 SwitchInst::CaseIt CaseI = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCase);
4392 assert(CaseI != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004393 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004394 if (HasWeight) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004395 std::swap(Weights[CaseI->getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004396 Weights.pop_back();
4397 }
4398
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004399 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004400 CaseI->getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4401 SI->removeCase(CaseI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004402 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00004403 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004404 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
4405 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004406 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
4407 .createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004408 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004409
4410 return !DeadCases.empty();
4411}
4412
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004413/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
4414/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004415/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
4416/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
4417/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
4418static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004419 BasicBlock *BB, int *PhiIndex) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004420 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004421 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004422 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004423 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004424
4425 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
4426 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004427 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004428
4429 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
4430
4431 BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
4432 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4433 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
4434 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
4435
4436 Value *InValue = PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004437 if (InValue != CaseValue)
4438 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004439
4440 *PhiIndex = Idx;
4441 return PHI;
4442 }
4443
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004444 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004445}
4446
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004447/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
4448/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
4449/// blocks of the switch can be folded away.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004450/// Returns true if a change is made.
4451static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004452 typedef DenseMap<PHINode *, SmallVector<int, 4>> ForwardingNodesMap;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004453 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
4454
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004455 for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
4456 ConstantInt *CaseValue = Case.getCaseValue();
4457 BasicBlock *CaseDest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004458
4459 int PhiIndex;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004460 PHINode *PHI =
4461 FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, &PhiIndex);
4462 if (!PHI)
4463 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004464
4465 ForwardingNodes[PHI].push_back(PhiIndex);
4466 }
4467
4468 bool Changed = false;
4469
4470 for (ForwardingNodesMap::iterator I = ForwardingNodes.begin(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004471 E = ForwardingNodes.end();
4472 I != E; ++I) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004473 PHINode *Phi = I->first;
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004474 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = I->second;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004475
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004476 if (Indexes.size() < 2)
4477 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004478
4479 for (size_t I = 0, E = Indexes.size(); I != E; ++I)
4480 Phi->setIncomingValue(Indexes[I], SI->getCondition());
4481 Changed = true;
4482 }
4483
4484 return Changed;
4485}
4486
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004487/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004488/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004489static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00004490 if (C->isThreadDependent())
4491 return false;
4492 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
4493 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004494
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004495 if (!isa<ConstantFP>(C) && !isa<ConstantInt>(C) &&
4496 !isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) && !isa<GlobalValue>(C) &&
4497 !isa<UndefValue>(C) && !isa<ConstantExpr>(C))
4498 return false;
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00004499
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004500 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C)) {
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004501 if (!CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing())
4502 return false;
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004503 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(CE->getOperand(0), TTI))
4504 return false;
4505 }
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004506
4507 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTablesForConstant(C))
4508 return false;
4509
4510 return true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004511}
4512
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004513/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004514/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004515static Constant *
4516LookupConstant(Value *V,
4517 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004518 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
4519 return C;
4520 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
4521}
4522
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004523/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004524/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
4525/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004526/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004527static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004528ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
4529 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004530 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004531 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
4532 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004533 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004534 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
4535 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
4536 if (A->isNullValue())
4537 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004538 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004539 }
4540
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004541 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
4542 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
4543 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
4544 COps.push_back(A);
4545 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004546 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004547 }
4548
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004549 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004550 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
4551 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004552 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004553
Manuel Jacobe9024592016-01-21 06:33:22 +00004554 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004555}
4556
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004557/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004558/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004559/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004560/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004561static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004562GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004563 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004564 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004565 const DataLayout &DL, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004566 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
4567 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
4568
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004569 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
4570 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004571 SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> ConstantPool;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004572 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
4573 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = CaseDest->begin(), E = CaseDest->end(); I != E;
4574 ++I) {
4575 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(I)) {
4576 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
David Majnemer8c03c1b2016-10-07 01:38:35 +00004577 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1 || T->isExceptional())
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004578 return false;
4579 Pred = CaseDest;
4580 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
4581 } else if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
4582 // Skip debug intrinsic.
4583 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004584 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&*I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004585 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004586
4587 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
4588 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
4589 // no longer dominate all its uses.
4590 for (auto &Use : I->uses()) {
4591 User *User = Use.getUser();
4592 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
4593 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
4594 continue;
4595 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
4596 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
4597 continue;
4598 return false;
4599 }
4600
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004601 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&*I, C));
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004602 } else {
4603 break;
4604 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004605 }
4606
4607 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
4608 if (!*CommonDest)
4609 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
4610 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
4611 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
4612 return false;
4613
4614 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
4615 BasicBlock::iterator I = (*CommonDest)->begin();
4616 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4617 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
4618 if (Idx == -1)
4619 continue;
4620
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004621 Constant *ConstVal =
4622 LookupConstant(PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx), ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004623 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004624 return false;
4625
4626 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004627 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004628 return false;
4629
4630 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(PHI, ConstVal));
4631 }
4632
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004633 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004634}
4635
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004636// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
4637// Result.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004638static void MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004639 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4640 Constant *Result) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004641 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
4642 if (I.first == Result) {
4643 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
4644 return;
4645 }
4646 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004647 UniqueResults.push_back(
4648 std::make_pair(Result, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004649}
4650
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004651// Helper function that initializes a map containing
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004652// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
4653// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
4654// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004655static bool InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI,
4656 BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
4657 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4658 Constant *&DefaultResult,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004659 const DataLayout &DL,
4660 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004661 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
4662 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
4663
4664 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4665 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
4666 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004667 DL, TTI))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004668 return false;
4669
4670 // Only one value per case is permitted
4671 if (Results.size() > 1)
4672 return false;
4673 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
4674
4675 // Check the PHI consistency.
4676 if (!PHI)
4677 PHI = Results[0].first;
4678 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
4679 return false;
4680 }
4681 // Find the default result value.
4682 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
4683 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
4684 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004685 DL, TTI);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004686 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
4687 // is unreachable.
4688 DefaultResult =
4689 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
4690 if ((!DefaultResult &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004691 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004692 return false;
4693
4694 return true;
4695}
4696
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004697// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
4698// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004699// Example:
4700// switch (a) {
4701// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
4702// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
4703// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
4704// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
4705// default:
4706// return 4;
4707// }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004708static Value *ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
4709 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
4710 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004711 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004712 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004713 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
4714 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
4715 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
4716 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
4717 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
4718 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
4719
4720 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
4721 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
4722 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
4723 Value *const ValueCompare =
4724 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4725 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
4726 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
4727 }
4728 Value *const ValueCompare =
4729 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004730 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first,
4731 SelectValue, "switch.select");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004732 }
4733
4734 return nullptr;
4735}
4736
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004737// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
4738// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004739static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
4740 Value *SelectValue,
4741 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4742 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
4743 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
4744 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
4745 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
4746
4747 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
4748
4749 // Remove the switch.
4750 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
4751 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
4752
4753 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
4754 continue;
4755 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
4756 }
4757 SI->eraseFromParent();
4758}
4759
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004760/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004761/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
4762/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00004763static bool switchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
4764 const DataLayout &DL,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004765 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004766 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
4767 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
4768 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
4769 Constant *DefaultResult;
4770 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
4771 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004772 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004773 DL, TTI))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004774 return false;
4775 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
4776 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
4777 return false;
4778 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
4779
4780 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004781 Value *SelectValue =
4782 ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(UniqueResults, DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004783 if (SelectValue) {
4784 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
4785 return true;
4786 }
4787 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
4788 return false;
4789}
4790
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004791namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004792
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004793/// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
4794class SwitchLookupTable {
4795public:
4796 /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
4797 /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
4798 SwitchLookupTable(
4799 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4800 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00004801 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL, const StringRef &FuncName);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004802
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004803 /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
4804 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
4805 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004806
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004807 /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
4808 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
4809 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
4810 Type *ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004811
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004812private:
4813 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
4814 // different ways.
4815 enum {
4816 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
4817 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
4818 SingleValueKind,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004819
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004820 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
4821 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
4822 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
4823 LinearMapKind,
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004824
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004825 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
4826 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
4827 // shift and mask operations.
4828 BitMapKind,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004829
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004830 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
4831 // instructions from the table.
4832 ArrayKind
4833 } Kind;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004834
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004835 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
4836 Constant *SingleValue;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004837
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004838 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
4839 ConstantInt *BitMap;
4840 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004841
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004842 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
4843 ConstantInt *LinearOffset;
4844 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004845
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004846 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
4847 GlobalVariable *Array;
4848};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004849
4850} // end anonymous namespace
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004851
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004852SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
4853 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4854 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00004855 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL, const StringRef &FuncName)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004856 : SingleValue(nullptr), BitMap(nullptr), BitMapElementTy(nullptr),
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004857 LinearOffset(nullptr), LinearMultiplier(nullptr), Array(nullptr) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004858 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
4859 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004860
4861 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004862 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004863
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004864 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
4865
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004866 // Build up the table contents.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004867 SmallVector<Constant *, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004868 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4869 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
4870 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004871 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004872
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004873 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004874 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
4875
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004876 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004877 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004878 }
4879
4880 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004881 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00004882 assert(DefaultValue &&
4883 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004884 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004885 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4886 if (!TableContents[I])
4887 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004888 }
4889
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004890 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004891 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004892 }
4893
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004894 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
4895 // that single value.
4896 if (SingleValue) {
4897 Kind = SingleValueKind;
4898 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004899 }
4900
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004901 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
4902 // table index.
4903 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
4904 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
4905 APInt PrevVal;
4906 APInt DistToPrev;
4907 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
4908 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
4909 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4910 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
4911 if (!ConstVal) {
4912 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
4913 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
4914 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4915 break;
4916 }
Craig Toppere777fed2017-05-22 00:49:35 +00004917 const APInt &Val = ConstVal->getValue();
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004918 if (I != 0) {
4919 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
4920 if (I == 1) {
4921 DistToPrev = Dist;
4922 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
4923 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4924 break;
4925 }
4926 }
4927 PrevVal = Val;
4928 }
4929 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
4930 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
4931 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
4932 Kind = LinearMapKind;
4933 ++NumLinearMaps;
4934 return;
4935 }
4936 }
4937
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004938 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004939 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004940 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004941 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
4942 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
4943 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00004944 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
4945 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
4946 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
4947 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
4948 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004949 }
4950 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
4951 BitMapElementTy = IT;
4952 Kind = BitMapKind;
4953 ++NumBitMaps;
4954 return;
4955 }
4956
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004957 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004958 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004959 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
4960
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004961 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/true,
4962 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, Initializer,
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00004963 "switch.table." + FuncName);
Peter Collingbourne96efdd62016-06-14 21:01:22 +00004964 Array->setUnnamedAddr(GlobalValue::UnnamedAddr::Global);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004965 Kind = ArrayKind;
4966}
4967
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004968Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004969 switch (Kind) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004970 case SingleValueKind:
4971 return SingleValue;
4972 case LinearMapKind: {
4973 // Derive the result value from the input value.
4974 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
4975 false, "switch.idx.cast");
4976 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
4977 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
4978 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
4979 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
4980 return Result;
4981 }
4982 case BitMapKind: {
4983 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
4984 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004985
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004986 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
4987 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
4988 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
4989 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004990
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004991 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
4992 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(
4993 ShiftAmt, ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
4994 "switch.shiftamt");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004995
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004996 // Shift down.
4997 Value *DownShifted =
4998 Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, "switch.downshift");
4999 // Mask off.
5000 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, "switch.masked");
5001 }
5002 case ArrayKind: {
5003 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
5004 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
5005 uint64_t TableSize =
5006 Array->getInitializer()->getType()->getArrayNumElements();
5007 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
5008 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(
5009 Index, IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(), IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
5010 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00005011
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005012 Value *GEPIndices[] = {Builder.getInt32(0), Index};
5013 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
5014 GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
5015 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
5016 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005017 }
5018 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
5019}
5020
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005021bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005022 uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00005023 Type *ElementType) {
5024 auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005025 if (!IT)
5026 return false;
5027 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
5028 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005029
5030 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005031 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX / IT->getBitWidth())
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005032 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005033 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005034}
5035
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005036/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
5037/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005038static bool
5039ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
5040 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
5041 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00005042 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
5043 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005044
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005045 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005046 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005047 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
5048 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005049
5050 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005051 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005052
5053 // Saturate this flag to false.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005054 AllTablesFitInRegister =
5055 AllTablesFitInRegister &&
5056 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005057
5058 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
5059 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
5060 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
5061 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005062 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005063 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005064
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005065 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
5066 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
5067 return true;
5068
5069 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
5070 if (HasIllegalType)
5071 return false;
5072
5073 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
5074 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
5075 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
5076 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005077}
5078
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005079/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
5080/// \code
5081/// if (idx < tablesize)
5082/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
5083/// else
5084/// r = default_value;
5085/// if (r != default_value)
5086/// ...
5087/// \endcode
5088/// Is optimized to:
5089/// \code
5090/// cond = idx < tablesize;
5091/// if (cond)
5092/// r = table[idx];
5093/// else
5094/// r = default_value;
5095/// if (cond)
5096/// ...
5097/// \endcode
5098/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005099static void reuseTableCompare(
5100 User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock, BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch,
5101 Constant *DefaultValue,
5102 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005103
5104 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
5105 if (!CmpInst)
5106 return;
5107
5108 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
5109 // threading can do its work afterwards.
5110 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
5111 return;
5112
5113 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
5114 if (!CmpOp1)
5115 return;
5116
5117 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
5118 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
5119 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
5120
5121 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
5122 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
5123 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
5124 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
5125 return;
5126
5127 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
5128 // compare result.
5129 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
5130 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005131 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005132 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst)
5133 return;
5134 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
5135 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
5136 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005137
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005138 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
5139 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
5140 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
5141 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
5142 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
5143 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
5144 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
5145 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
5146 return;
5147 }
5148
5149 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
5150 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
5151 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
5152 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5153 } else {
5154 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005155 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(
5156 RangeCmp, ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
5157 RangeCheckBranch);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005158 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
5159 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5160 }
5161}
5162
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005163/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
5164/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
5165/// lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005166static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5167 const DataLayout &DL,
5168 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005169 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005170
Sumanth Gundapaneni8d50a502017-07-28 22:25:40 +00005171 Function *Fn = SI->getParent()->getParent();
5172 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it or the
5173 // attribute is not set.
5174 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables() ||
5175 (Fn->getFnAttribute("no-jump-tables").getValueAsString() == "true"))
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005176 return false;
5177
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005178 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
5179 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
5180
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005181 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
5182 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
5183 // string and lookup indices into that.
5184
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005185 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005186 // them faster, so we don't analyze them.
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00005187 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005188 return false;
5189
5190 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
Eric Christopher572e03a2015-06-19 01:53:21 +00005191 // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005192 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
5193 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005194 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
5195 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005196
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005197 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005198 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>, 4> ResultListTy;
5199 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
5200 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Constant *> DefaultResults;
5201 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> ResultTypes;
5202 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005203
5204 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005205 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005206 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
5207 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
5208 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
5209 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
5210
5211 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005212 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> ResultsTy;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005213 ResultsTy Results;
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005214 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI->getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005215 Results, DL, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005216 return false;
5217
5218 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005219 for (const auto &I : Results) {
5220 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5221 Constant *Value = I.second;
5222 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
5223 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
5224 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005225 }
5226 }
5227
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005228 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005229 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005230 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
5231 }
5232
5233 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
5234 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
5235 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
5236 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
5237
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005238 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
5239 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005240 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005241 bool HasDefaultResults =
5242 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest,
5243 DefaultResultsList, DL, TTI);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005244
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005245 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
5246 if (NeedMask) {
5247 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005248 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005249 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005250 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005251 return false;
5252 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005253
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005254 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
5255 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5256 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00005257 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005258 }
5259
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005260 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005261 return false;
5262
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005263 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005264 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005265 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(
5266 Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup", CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005267
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005268 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005269 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Sanjay Patel73811a12017-09-20 22:31:35 +00005270 Value *TableIndex;
5271 if (MinCaseVal->isNullValue())
5272 TableIndex = SI->getCondition();
5273 else
5274 TableIndex = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal,
5275 "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005276
5277 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
5278 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005279 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005280 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005281 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
5282 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
5283 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
5284
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005285 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
5286 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
5287 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
5288 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
5289 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
5290 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005291 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
5292
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005293 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005294 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005295 // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
5296 // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005297 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005298 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(
5299 TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
5300 RangeCheckBranch =
5301 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005302 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005303
5304 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
5305 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005306
5307 if (NeedMask) {
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005308 // Before doing the lookup, we do the hole check. The LookupBB is therefore
5309 // re-purposed to do the hole check, and we create a new LookupBB.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005310 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
5311 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005312 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup",
5313 CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005314
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005315 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8-bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00005316 // unnecessary illegal types.
5317 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
5318 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
5319 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005320 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005321 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
5322 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005323 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue())
5324 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005325 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
5326 }
5327 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
5328
5329 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
5330 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
5331 // else continue with table lookup.
5332 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005333 Value *MaskIndex =
5334 Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy, "switch.maskindex");
5335 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex, "switch.shifted");
5336 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(
5337 Shifted, Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()), "switch.lobit");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005338 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
5339
5340 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
5341 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
5342 }
5343
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005344 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005345 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs. To avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005346 // do not delete PHINodes here.
5347 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
5348 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
5349 }
5350
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005351 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005352 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
5353 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005354 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005355
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005356 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
5357 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Sumanth Gundapaneni8d50a502017-07-28 22:25:40 +00005358 StringRef FuncName = Fn->getName();
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00005359 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL,
5360 FuncName);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005361
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005362 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005363
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005364 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
5365 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005366 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
5367 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005368 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
5369 ReturnedEarly = true;
5370 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005371 }
5372
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005373 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
5374 // possible.
5375 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
5376 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
5377 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
5378 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
5379 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
5380 }
5381 }
5382
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005383 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005384 }
5385
5386 if (!ReturnedEarly)
5387 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
5388
5389 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005390 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005391 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005392
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005393 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005394 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005395 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
5396 }
5397 SI->eraseFromParent();
5398
5399 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005400 if (NeedMask)
5401 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005402 return true;
5403}
5404
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005405static bool isSwitchDense(ArrayRef<int64_t> Values) {
5406 // See also SelectionDAGBuilder::isDense(), which this function was based on.
5407 uint64_t Diff = (uint64_t)Values.back() - (uint64_t)Values.front();
5408 uint64_t Range = Diff + 1;
5409 uint64_t NumCases = Values.size();
5410 // 40% is the default density for building a jump table in optsize/minsize mode.
5411 uint64_t MinDensity = 40;
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005412
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005413 return NumCases * 100 >= Range * MinDensity;
5414}
5415
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005416/// Try to transform a switch that has "holes" in it to a contiguous sequence
5417/// of cases.
5418///
5419/// A switch such as: switch(i) {case 5: case 9: case 13: case 17:} can be
5420/// range-reduced to: switch ((i-5) / 4) {case 0: case 1: case 2: case 3:}.
5421///
5422/// This converts a sparse switch into a dense switch which allows better
5423/// lowering and could also allow transforming into a lookup table.
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005424static bool ReduceSwitchRange(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5425 const DataLayout &DL,
5426 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
5427 auto *CondTy = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5428 if (CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth() > 64 ||
5429 !DL.fitsInLegalInteger(CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth()))
5430 return false;
5431 // Only bother with this optimization if there are more than 3 switch cases;
5432 // SDAG will only bother creating jump tables for 4 or more cases.
5433 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4)
5434 return false;
5435
5436 // This transform is agnostic to the signedness of the input or case values. We
5437 // can treat the case values as signed or unsigned. We can optimize more common
5438 // cases such as a sequence crossing zero {-4,0,4,8} if we interpret case values
5439 // as signed.
5440 SmallVector<int64_t,4> Values;
5441 for (auto &C : SI->cases())
5442 Values.push_back(C.getCaseValue()->getValue().getSExtValue());
5443 std::sort(Values.begin(), Values.end());
5444
5445 // If the switch is already dense, there's nothing useful to do here.
5446 if (isSwitchDense(Values))
5447 return false;
5448
5449 // First, transform the values such that they start at zero and ascend.
5450 int64_t Base = Values[0];
5451 for (auto &V : Values)
5452 V -= Base;
5453
5454 // Now we have signed numbers that have been shifted so that, given enough
5455 // precision, there are no negative values. Since the rest of the transform
5456 // is bitwise only, we switch now to an unsigned representation.
5457 uint64_t GCD = 0;
5458 for (auto &V : Values)
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005459 GCD = GreatestCommonDivisor64(GCD, (uint64_t)V);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005460
5461 // This transform can be done speculatively because it is so cheap - it results
5462 // in a single rotate operation being inserted. This can only happen if the
5463 // factor extracted is a power of 2.
5464 // FIXME: If the GCD is an odd number we can multiply by the multiplicative
5465 // inverse of GCD and then perform this transform.
5466 // FIXME: It's possible that optimizing a switch on powers of two might also
5467 // be beneficial - flag values are often powers of two and we could use a CLZ
5468 // as the key function.
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005469 if (GCD <= 1 || !isPowerOf2_64(GCD))
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005470 // No common divisor found or too expensive to compute key function.
5471 return false;
5472
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005473 unsigned Shift = Log2_64(GCD);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005474 for (auto &V : Values)
5475 V = (int64_t)((uint64_t)V >> Shift);
5476
5477 if (!isSwitchDense(Values))
5478 // Transform didn't create a dense switch.
5479 return false;
5480
5481 // The obvious transform is to shift the switch condition right and emit a
5482 // check that the condition actually cleanly divided by GCD, i.e.
5483 // C & (1 << Shift - 1) == 0
5484 // inserting a new CFG edge to handle the case where it didn't divide cleanly.
5485 //
5486 // A cheaper way of doing this is a simple ROTR(C, Shift). This performs the
5487 // shift and puts the shifted-off bits in the uppermost bits. If any of these
5488 // are nonzero then the switch condition will be very large and will hit the
5489 // default case.
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005490
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005491 auto *Ty = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5492 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
5493 auto *ShiftC = ConstantInt::get(Ty, Shift);
5494 auto *Sub = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), ConstantInt::get(Ty, Base));
Benjamin Krameraa160c22016-08-05 14:55:02 +00005495 auto *LShr = Builder.CreateLShr(Sub, ShiftC);
5496 auto *Shl = Builder.CreateShl(Sub, Ty->getBitWidth() - Shift);
5497 auto *Rot = Builder.CreateOr(LShr, Shl);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005498 SI->replaceUsesOfWith(SI->getCondition(), Rot);
5499
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005500 for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
5501 auto *Orig = Case.getCaseValue();
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005502 auto Sub = Orig->getValue() - APInt(Ty->getBitWidth(), Base);
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005503 Case.setValue(
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005504 cast<ConstantInt>(ConstantInt::get(Ty, Sub.lshr(ShiftC->getValue()))));
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005505 }
5506 return true;
5507}
5508
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005509bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005510 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
5511
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005512 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
5513 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5514 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
5515 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
5516 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005517 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005518
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005519 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
5520 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
5521 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005522 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005523
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005524 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
5525 // away into any preds.
5526 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
5527 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5528 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
5529 ++BBI;
5530 if (SI == &*BBI)
5531 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005532 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005533 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00005534
5535 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005536 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005537 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005538
5539 // Remove unreachable cases.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005540 if (eliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, Options.AC, DL))
5541 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005542
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005543 if (switchToSelect(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
5544 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00005545
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005546 if (ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005547 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005548
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005549 // The conversion from switch to lookup tables results in difficult-to-analyze
5550 // code and makes pruning branches much harder. This is a problem if the
5551 // switch expression itself can still be restricted as a result of inlining or
5552 // CVP. Therefore, only apply this transformation during late stages of the
5553 // optimisation pipeline.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005554 if (Options.ConvertSwitchToLookupTable &&
5555 SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005556 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005557
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005558 if (ReduceSwitchRange(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005559 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005560
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005561 return false;
5562}
5563
5564bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
5565 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
5566 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005567
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005568 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
5569 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
5570 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
5571 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00005572 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005573 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
5574 IBI->removeDestination(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005575 --i;
5576 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005577 Changed = true;
5578 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005579 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005580
5581 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
5582 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
5583 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
5584 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5585 return true;
5586 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005587
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005588 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
5589 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
5590 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
5591 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5592 return true;
5593 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005594
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005595 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
5596 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005597 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005598 }
5599 return Changed;
5600}
5601
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005602/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
5603/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with. This
5604/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
5605/// a shared handler.
5606///
5607/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
5608/// here. That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere. In
5609/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
5610/// when dealing with exception dense code. (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
5611/// sinking in this file)
5612///
5613/// This is primarily a code size optimization. We need to avoid performing
5614/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
5615/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning). We do this by not
5616/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi. Since the same
5617/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't loose any ability to
5618/// specialize. If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
5619///
5620/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
5621/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
5622/// merged. In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
5623static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
5624 BasicBlock *BB) {
5625 auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
5626 assert(Succ);
5627 // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
5628 // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
5629 if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
5630 return false;
5631
5632 for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
5633 if (BB == OtherPred)
5634 continue;
5635 BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
5636 LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
5637 if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
5638 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005639 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5640 }
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005641 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
5642 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
5643 continue;
5644
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00005645 // We've found an identical block. Update our predecessors to take that
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005646 // path instead and make ourselves dead.
5647 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds;
5648 Preds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
5649 for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
5650 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005651 assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB && II->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
5652 "unexpected successor");
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005653 II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
5654 }
5655
5656 // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
5657 // used to go through BB. We need to delete it or update it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005658 for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end(); I != E;) {
5659 Instruction &Inst = *I;
5660 I++;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005661 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
5662 Inst.eraseFromParent();
5663 }
5664
5665 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs;
5666 Succs.insert(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
5667 for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
5668 Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
5669 }
5670
5671 IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
5672 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5673 BI->eraseFromParent();
5674 return true;
5675 }
5676 return false;
5677}
5678
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005679bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI,
5680 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005681 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005682 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005683
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00005684 if (SinkCommon && SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BI))
5685 return true;
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005686
5687 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005688 // If LoopHeader is provided, check if the block or its successor is a loop
5689 // header. (This is for early invocations before loop simplify and
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005690 // vectorization to keep canonical loop forms for nested loops. These blocks
5691 // can be eliminated when the pass is invoked later in the back-end.)
5692 bool NeedCanonicalLoop =
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005693 Options.NeedCanonicalLoop &&
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005694 (LoopHeaders && (LoopHeaders->count(BB) || LoopHeaders->count(Succ)));
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005695 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005696 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005697 !NeedCanonicalLoop && TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005698 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005699
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005700 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison against a
5701 // constant, try to simplify the block.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005702 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
5703 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
5704 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5705 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005706 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005707 tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, DL, TTI, Options))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005708 return true;
5709 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005710
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005711 // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
5712 // equivalent.
5713 if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005714 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5715 }
5716 if (I->isTerminator() && TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB))
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005717 return true;
5718 }
5719
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00005720 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5721 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
5722 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
5723 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005724 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, Options.BonusInstThreshold))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005725 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005726 return false;
5727}
5728
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005729static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
5730 BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
5731 for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
5732 BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
5733 if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
5734 return nullptr;
5735 PredPred = PPred;
5736 }
5737 return PredPred;
5738}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005739
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005740bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005741 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005742
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005743 // Conditional branch
5744 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
5745 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5746 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
5747 // switch.
5748 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005749 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005750 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005751
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005752 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
5753 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5754 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin();
5755 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5756 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5757 ++I;
5758 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005759 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005760 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005761 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005762 ++I;
5763 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5764 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5765 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005766 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005767 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005768 }
5769 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005770
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005771 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005772 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005773 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005774
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005775 // If this basic block has a single dominating predecessor block and the
5776 // dominating block's condition implies BI's condition, we know the direction
5777 // of the BI branch.
5778 if (BasicBlock *Dom = BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5779 auto *PBI = dyn_cast_or_null<BranchInst>(Dom->getTerminator());
5780 if (PBI && PBI->isConditional() &&
Craig Topperdfd01ea2017-07-06 16:29:43 +00005781 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
5782 assert(PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB || PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB);
Chad Rosierdfd1de62017-08-01 20:18:54 +00005783 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005784 Optional<bool> Implication = isImpliedCondition(
Chad Rosierdfd1de62017-08-01 20:18:54 +00005785 PBI->getCondition(), BI->getCondition(), DL, CondIsTrue);
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005786 if (Implication) {
5787 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
5788 auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
5789 ConstantInt *CI = *Implication
5790 ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext())
5791 : ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
5792 BI->setCondition(CI);
5793 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005794 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005795 }
5796 }
5797 }
5798
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00005799 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5800 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
5801 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005802 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, Options.BonusInstThreshold))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005803 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005804
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005805 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
5806 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
5807 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
5808 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005809 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5810 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005811 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005812 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005813 } else {
5814 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005815 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005816 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
5817 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5818 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005819 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005820 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005821 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005822 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005823 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005824 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005825 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
5826 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5827 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005828 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005829 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005830 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005831
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005832 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
5833 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
5834 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
5835 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005836 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL, Options.AC))
5837 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005838
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005839 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00005840 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
5841 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005842 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00005843 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DL))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005844 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005845
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005846 // Look for diamond patterns.
5847 if (MergeCondStores)
5848 if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
5849 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
5850 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00005851 if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI, DL))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005852 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005853
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005854 return false;
5855}
5856
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005857/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
5858static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
5859 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
5860 if (!C)
5861 return false;
5862
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005863 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005864 return false;
5865
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005866 if (C->isNullValue() || isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005867 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005868 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005869
5870 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
5871 // control flow (eg. calls)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith0a12729f2016-08-16 23:57:56 +00005872 for (BasicBlock::iterator
5873 i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I),
5874 UI = BasicBlock::iterator(dyn_cast<Instruction>(Use));
5875 i != UI; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005876 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005877 return false;
5878
5879 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
5880 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
5881 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
5882 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
5883
5884 // Look through bitcasts.
5885 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
5886 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
5887
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005888 // Load from null is undefined.
5889 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005890 if (!LI->isVolatile())
5891 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005892
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005893 // Store to null is undefined.
5894 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005895 if (!SI->isVolatile())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005896 return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 &&
5897 SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005898
5899 // A call to null is undefined.
5900 if (auto CS = CallSite(Use))
5901 return CS.getCalledValue() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005902 }
5903 return false;
5904}
5905
5906/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005907/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005908static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
5909 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = BB->begin();
5910 PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(i); ++i)
5911 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
5912 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI->getIncomingValue(i), PHI)) {
5913 TerminatorInst *T = PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
5914 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
5915 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
5916 BB->removePredecessor(PHI->getIncomingBlock(i));
5917 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
5918 // destination from conditional branches.
5919 if (BI->isUnconditional())
5920 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5921 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005922 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1)
5923 : BI->getSuccessor(0));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005924 BI->eraseFromParent();
5925 return true;
5926 }
5927 // TODO: SwitchInst.
5928 }
5929
5930 return false;
5931}
5932
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005933bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00005934 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005935
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00005936 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005937 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005938
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005939 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
5940 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005941 if ((pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005942 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00005943 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
5944 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
5945 return true;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005946 }
5947
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005948 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
5949 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00005950 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005951
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00005952 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
5953 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
5954
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005955 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
5956 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
5957
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00005958 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
5959 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
5960 // if there are no PHI nodes.
5961 //
5962 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
5963 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005964
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00005965 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
5966
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005967 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
5968 // eliminate it, do so now.
5969 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
5970 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005971 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005972
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005973 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005974 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005975 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005976 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder))
5977 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005978 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005979 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder))
5980 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005981 }
5982 } else if (ReturnInst *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005983 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder))
5984 return true;
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +00005985 } else if (ResumeInst *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005986 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder))
5987 return true;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00005988 } else if (CleanupReturnInst *RI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005989 dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5990 if (SimplifyCleanupReturn(RI))
5991 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005992 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005993 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder))
5994 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005995 } else if (UnreachableInst *UI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005996 dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5997 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI))
5998 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005999 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006000 dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
6001 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI))
6002 return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00006003 }
6004
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00006005 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006006}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006007
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00006008bool llvm::simplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
6009 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00006010 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders) {
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00006011 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(), LoopHeaders,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00006012 Options)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006013 .run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006014}